Notice - PLANET Technology Corporation.

User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User's Manual
WGSW-24020
WGSW-48040
24/48-Port 10/100/1000Mbps
with 2/4 Shared SFP
Managed Ethernet Switch
-1-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Trademarks
Copyright © PLANET Technology Corp. 2007.
Contents subject to which revision without prior notice.
PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp.
All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.
Disclaimer
PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications, and makes no
warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for
a particular purpose.
PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User's Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or
omissions that may have occurred.
Information in this User's Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of
PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User's Manual. PLANET makes
no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User's Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to
this User's Manual and/or to the products described in this User's Manual, at any time without notice.
If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would appreciate your comments and
suggestions.
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at whose own expense.
CE Mark Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
WEEE Warning
To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end users of electrical and electronic
equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of
WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.
Revision
PLANET 24/48-Port 10/100/1000Mbps with 2/4 Shared SFP Managed Ethernet Switch User's Manual
FOR MODELS: WGSW-24020 / WGSW-48040
REVISION: 1.0 (MAY.2007)
Part No: EM-WGSW24020_484040_v1.0 (2081-A34030-001)
-2-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................14
1.1 Packet Contents ............................................................................................................................................................14
1.2 How to Use This Manual................................................................................................................................................14
1.3 Product Feature .............................................................................................................................................................15
1.4 Product Specification .....................................................................................................................................................16
2. INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................................................................18
2.1 Product Description .......................................................................................................................................................18
2.1.1 Product Overview ................................................................................................................................................18
2.1.2 Switch Front Panel ..............................................................................................................................................18
2.1.3 LED Indications ...................................................................................................................................................19
2.1.4 Switch Rear Panel ...............................................................................................................................................19
2.2 Install the Switch............................................................................................................................................................20
2.2.1 Desktop Installation .............................................................................................................................................20
2.2.2 Rack Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................21
2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver ..............................................................................................................................22
3. CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................................................................24
3.1 Management Access Overview......................................................................................................................................24
3.1.1 Administration Console ........................................................................................................................................25
3.1.2 Direct Access.......................................................................................................................................................25
3.2 Web Management .........................................................................................................................................................25
3.3 SNMP-Based Network Management .............................................................................................................................26
3.4 Protocols........................................................................................................................................................................26
3.4.1 Virtual Terminal Protocols ....................................................................................................................................26
3.4.2 SNMP Protocol ....................................................................................................................................................26
3.4.3 Management Architecture....................................................................................................................................26
4. Web Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................27
4.1 Main Screen...................................................................................................................................................................29
4.2 Setup .............................................................................................................................................................................30
4.2.1 Summary .............................................................................................................................................................30
4.2.2 Network Settings .................................................................................................................................................32
4.2.3 Time.....................................................................................................................................................................33
4.3 Port Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................36
4.3.1 Port settings.........................................................................................................................................................36
4.3.2 Link Aggregation..................................................................................................................................................38
4.3.3 LACP ...................................................................................................................................................................40
4.4 VLAN Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................41
4.4.1 Create VLAN .......................................................................................................................................................42
4.4.2 Port setting ..........................................................................................................................................................43
4.4.3 Ports to VLAN......................................................................................................................................................44
-3-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.4.4 GVRP ..................................................................................................................................................................45
4.5 Statistics ........................................................................................................................................................................46
4.5.1 RMON Statisti ......................................................................................................................................................46
4.5.2 RMON History .....................................................................................................................................................47
4.5.3 RMON Alarm .......................................................................................................................................................49
4.5.4 RMON Events......................................................................................................................................................51
4.5.5 Port Utilization .....................................................................................................................................................52
4.5.6 802.1x Statistics...................................................................................................................................................53
4.5.7 GVRP Statistics ...................................................................................................................................................54
4.6 ACL................................................................................................................................................................................57
4.6.1 IP Based ACL ......................................................................................................................................................57
4.6.2 IP Based ACL Configure Sample.........................................................................................................................60
4.6.3 MAC Based ACL..................................................................................................................................................63
4.6.4 MAC Based ACL Configure Sample ....................................................................................................................65
4.7 Security..........................................................................................................................................................................69
4.7.1 ACL Binding .........................................................................................................................................................69
4.7.2 Radius .................................................................................................................................................................70
4.7.3 TACACS+ ............................................................................................................................................................72
4.7.4 802.1x settings ....................................................................................................................................................73
4.7.5 Port Security ........................................................................................................................................................78
4.7.6 Multiple Hosts ......................................................................................................................................................80
4.7.7 Storm control .......................................................................................................................................................81
4.8 QoS ...............................................................................................................................................................................82
4.8.1 CoS Settings........................................................................................................................................................82
4.8.2 Queue Setting......................................................................................................................................................84
4.8.3 DSCP Settings.....................................................................................................................................................85
4.8.4 Bandwidth............................................................................................................................................................86
4.8.5 Basic Mode..........................................................................................................................................................87
4.8.6 Advanced Mode...................................................................................................................................................88
4.9. Spanning Tree...............................................................................................................................................................93
4.9.1 STP Status...........................................................................................................................................................99
4.9.2 The Global STP .................................................................................................................................................100
4.9.3 STP Port Settings ..............................................................................................................................................102
4.9.4 RSTP Port settings ............................................................................................................................................105
4.9.5 MSTP Properties ...............................................................................................................................................106
4.9.6 MSTP Instance Settings ....................................................................................................................................107
4.9.7 MSTP Interface Settings....................................................................................................................................109
4.10 Multicast .................................................................................................................................................................... 111
4.10.1 IGMP Snooping ............................................................................................................................................... 113
4.10.2 Bridge Multicast ............................................................................................................................................... 115
-4-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.10.3 Bridge Multicast Forward All ............................................................................................................................ 117
4.11 SNMP......................................................................................................................................................................... 118
4.11.1 Global Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 118
4.11.2 Views ............................................................................................................................................................... 119
4.11.3 Group Profile....................................................................................................................................................120
4.11.4 Group Membership ..........................................................................................................................................121
4.11.5 Communities ....................................................................................................................................................123
4.11.6 Notification Filter ..............................................................................................................................................125
4.11.7 Notification Recipient .......................................................................................................................................126
4.12 Admin.........................................................................................................................................................................128
4.12.1 User Authentication .........................................................................................................................................128
4.12.2 Static Address ..................................................................................................................................................129
4.12.3 Dynamic Address.............................................................................................................................................131
4.12.4 Logging............................................................................................................................................................132
4.12.5 Port Mirroring...................................................................................................................................................133
4.12.6 Cable Test........................................................................................................................................................134
4.12.7 Save Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................135
4.12.8 Jumbo Frame ..................................................................................................................................................136
4.12.9 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................................136
4.12.10 Reboot ...........................................................................................................................................................138
4.12.11 Factory Defaults.............................................................................................................................................138
4.12.12 Server Logs ...................................................................................................................................................138
4.12.13 Memory Logs.................................................................................................................................................140
4.12.14 Flash Logs .....................................................................................................................................................141
5. COMMAND STRUCTURE....................................................................................................................................................142
5.1 Connect to PC’s RS-232 serial port .............................................................................................................................142
5.2 Using the CLI ...............................................................................................................................................................143
5.2.1 CLI Command Modes........................................................................................................................................143
5.2.2 Starting the CLI ..................................................................................................................................................145
5.2.3 Editing Features ................................................................................................................................................146
5.3 AAA Commands...........................................................................................................................................................149
5.3.1 aaa authentication login.....................................................................................................................................149
5.3.2 aaa authentication enable..................................................................................................................................150
5.3.3 login authentication............................................................................................................................................151
5.3.4 enable authentication ........................................................................................................................................152
5.3.5 ip http authentication .........................................................................................................................................153
5.3.6 ip https authentication........................................................................................................................................154
5.3.7 show authentication methods ............................................................................................................................155
5.3.8 password ...........................................................................................................................................................156
5.3.9 enable password ...............................................................................................................................................156
-5-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.3.10 username.........................................................................................................................................................157
5.3.11 show users accounts .......................................................................................................................................158
5.4 Address Table Commands ...........................................................................................................................................158
5.4.1 bridge address...................................................................................................................................................158
5.4.2 bridge multicast filtering .....................................................................................................................................159
5.4.3 bridge multicast address....................................................................................................................................160
5.4.4 bridge multicast forbidden address ....................................................................................................................161
3.4.5 bridge multicast forward-unregistered ...............................................................................................................162
5.4.6 bridge multicast forbidden forward-unregistered................................................................................................162
5.4.7 bridge multicast forward-all................................................................................................................................163
5.4.8 bridge multicast forbidden forward-all ................................................................................................................164
5.4.9 bridge aging-time...............................................................................................................................................165
5.4.10 clear bridge......................................................................................................................................................165
5.4.11 port security .....................................................................................................................................................166
5.4.12 port security routed secure-address ................................................................................................................166
5.4.13 show bridge address-table...............................................................................................................................167
5.4.14 show bridge address-table static .....................................................................................................................168
5.4.15 show bridge address-table count .....................................................................................................................169
5.4.16 show bridge multicast address-table................................................................................................................169
5.4.17 show bridge multicast filtering..........................................................................................................................170
5.4.18 show ports security ..........................................................................................................................................171
5.5 Clock Commands ........................................................................................................................................................172
5.5.1 clock set.............................................................................................................................................................172
5.5.2 clock source.......................................................................................................................................................173
5.5.3 clock timezone...................................................................................................................................................173
5.5.4 clock summer-time ............................................................................................................................................174
5.5.5 sntp authentication-key......................................................................................................................................176
5.5.6 sntp authenticate ...............................................................................................................................................176
5.5.7 sntp trusted-key .................................................................................................................................................177
5.5.8 sntp client poll timer ...........................................................................................................................................177
5.5.9 sntp broadcast client enable ..............................................................................................................................178
5.5.10 sntp anycast client enable ...............................................................................................................................179
5.5.11 sntp client enable (interface)............................................................................................................................179
5.5.12 sntp unicast client enable ................................................................................................................................180
5.5.13 sntp unicast client poll......................................................................................................................................180
5.5.14 sntp server.......................................................................................................................................................181
5.5.15 show clock .......................................................................................................................................................182
5.5.16 show sntp configuration ...................................................................................................................................183
5.5.17 show sntp status ..............................................................................................................................................184
5.6 Configuration and Image Files .....................................................................................................................................185
-6-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.6.1 copy ...................................................................................................................................................................185
5.6.2 show startup-config............................................................................................................................................188
5.7 Ethernet Configuration Commands..............................................................................................................................190
5.7.1 interface ethernet...............................................................................................................................................190
5.7.2 interface range ethernet.....................................................................................................................................190
5.7.3 shutdown ...........................................................................................................................................................191
5.7.4 description .........................................................................................................................................................192
5.7.5 speed.................................................................................................................................................................192
5.7.6 duplex ................................................................................................................................................................193
5.7.7 negotiation .........................................................................................................................................................194
5.7.8 flowcontrol .........................................................................................................................................................194
5.7.9 mdix ...................................................................................................................................................................195
5.7.10 back-pressure..................................................................................................................................................196
5.7.11 port jumbo-frame..............................................................................................................................................196
5.7.12 clear counters ..................................................................................................................................................197
5.7.13 set interface active...........................................................................................................................................197
5.7.14 show interfaces configuration ..........................................................................................................................198
5.7.15 show interfaces status .....................................................................................................................................199
5.7.16 show interfaces description .............................................................................................................................201
5.7.17 show interfaces counters .................................................................................................................................201
5.7.18 show ports jumbo-frame ..................................................................................................................................204
5.7.19 port storm-control broadcast enable ................................................................................................................205
5.7.20 port storm-control broadcast rate.....................................................................................................................205
5.7.21 show ports storm-control .................................................................................................................................206
5.8 GVRP Commands .......................................................................................................................................................207
5.8.1 gvrp enable (global) ...........................................................................................................................................207
5.8.2 gvrp enable (interface).......................................................................................................................................207
5.8.3 garp timer ..........................................................................................................................................................208
5.8.4 gvrp vlan-creation-forbid ....................................................................................................................................209
5.8.5 gvrp registration-forbid.......................................................................................................................................210
5.8.7 clear gvrp statistics ............................................................................................................................................210
5.8.8 show gvrp configuration..................................................................................................................................... 211
5.8.9 show gvrp statistics............................................................................................................................................212
5.8.10 show gvrp error-statistics.................................................................................................................................213
5.9 IGMP Snooping Commands ........................................................................................................................................214
5.9.1 ip igmp snooping (Global)..................................................................................................................................214
5.9.2 ip igmp snooping (Interface) ..............................................................................................................................214
5.9.3 ip igmp snooping mrouter ..................................................................................................................................215
5.9.4 ip igmp snooping host-time-out..........................................................................................................................215
5.9.5 ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out ....................................................................................................................216
-7-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.9.6 ip igmp snooping leave-time-out........................................................................................................................217
5.9.7 show ip igmp snooping mrouter.........................................................................................................................217
5.9.8 show ip igmp snooping interface .......................................................................................................................218
5.9.9 show ip igmp snooping groups ..........................................................................................................................219
5.10 IP Addressing Commands .........................................................................................................................................220
5.10.1 ip address ........................................................................................................................................................220
5.10.2 ip address dhcp ...............................................................................................................................................220
5.10.3 ip default-gateway ...........................................................................................................................................221
5.10.4 show ip interface..............................................................................................................................................222
5.10.5 arp ...................................................................................................................................................................223
5.10.6 arp timeout.......................................................................................................................................................223
5.10.7 clear arp-cache................................................................................................................................................224
5.10.8 show arp ..........................................................................................................................................................224
5.11 LACP Commands ......................................................................................................................................................225
5.11.1 lacp system-priority ..........................................................................................................................................225
5.11.2 lacp port-priority ...............................................................................................................................................226
5.11.3 lacp timeout .....................................................................................................................................................226
5.11.4 show lacp ethernet...........................................................................................................................................227
5.11.5 show lacp port-channel ....................................................................................................................................228
5.12 Line Commands.........................................................................................................................................................229
5.12.1 line ...................................................................................................................................................................229
5.12.2 speed...............................................................................................................................................................229
5.12.3 exec-timeout ....................................................................................................................................................230
5.12.4 show line..........................................................................................................................................................230
5.13 Management ACL Commands ...................................................................................................................................231
5.13.1 management access-list ..................................................................................................................................231
5.13.2 permit (management) ......................................................................................................................................233
5.13.3 deny (management) ........................................................................................................................................233
5.13.4 management access-class ..............................................................................................................................234
5.13.5 show management access-list.........................................................................................................................235
5.13.6 show management access-class .....................................................................................................................236
5.14 PHY Diagnostics Commands.....................................................................................................................................236
5.14.1 test copper-port tdr ..........................................................................................................................................236
5.14.2 show copper-ports tdr ......................................................................................................................................237
5.14.3 show copper-ports cable-length.......................................................................................................................238
5.14.4 show fiber-ports optical-transceiver .................................................................................................................238
5.15 Port Channel Commands ..........................................................................................................................................240
5.15.1 interface port-channel ......................................................................................................................................240
5.15.2 interface range port-channel............................................................................................................................241
5.15.3 channel-group..................................................................................................................................................241
-8-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.15.4 show interfaces port-channel...........................................................................................................................242
5.16 Port Monitor Commands ............................................................................................................................................243
5.16.1 port monitor .....................................................................................................................................................243
5.16.2 show ports monitor ..........................................................................................................................................244
5.17 QoS Commands ........................................................................................................................................................246
5.17.1 qos...................................................................................................................................................................246
5.17.2 show qos .........................................................................................................................................................246
5.17.3 wrr-queue cos-map..........................................................................................................................................247
5.17.4 wrr-queue bandwidth .......................................................................................................................................248
5.17.5 priority-queue out num-of-queues....................................................................................................................249
5.17.6 show qos interface...........................................................................................................................................249
5.17.7 qos map dscp-queue .......................................................................................................................................252
5.17.8 qos trust (Global) .............................................................................................................................................253
5.17.9 qos trust (Interface) .........................................................................................................................................254
5.17.10 qos cos ..........................................................................................................................................................254
5.17.11 qos cos override.............................................................................................................................................255
5.17.12 show qos map ...............................................................................................................................................256
5.18 Radius Commands ....................................................................................................................................................257
5.18.1 radius-server host ............................................................................................................................................257
5.18.2 radius-server key .............................................................................................................................................259
5.18.3 radius-server retransmit...................................................................................................................................259
5.18.4 radius-server source-ip ....................................................................................................................................260
5.18.5 radius-server timeout .......................................................................................................................................260
5.18.6 radius-server deadtime ....................................................................................................................................261
5.18.7 show radius-servers ........................................................................................................................................262
5.19 RMON Commands ....................................................................................................................................................263
5.19.1 show rmon statistics ........................................................................................................................................263
5.19.2 rmon collection history .....................................................................................................................................265
5.19.3 show rmon collection history............................................................................................................................265
5.19.4 show rmon history ...........................................................................................................................................266
5.19.5 rmon alarm ......................................................................................................................................................269
5.19.6 show rmon alarm-table ....................................................................................................................................270
5.19.7 show rmon alarm .............................................................................................................................................271
5.19.8 rmon event.......................................................................................................................................................273
5.19.9 show rmon events............................................................................................................................................274
5.19.10 show rmon log ...............................................................................................................................................275
5.19.11 rmon table-size ..............................................................................................................................................276
5.20 SNMP Commands .....................................................................................................................................................277
5.20.1 snmp-server community ..................................................................................................................................277
5.20.2 snmp-server contact ........................................................................................................................................278
-9-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.20.3 snmp-server location .......................................................................................................................................279
5.20.4 snmp-server enable traps ................................................................................................................................279
5.20.5 snmp-server trap authentication ......................................................................................................................280
5.20.6 snmp-server host .............................................................................................................................................280
5.20.7 snmp-server set ...............................................................................................................................................281
5.20.8 show snmp ......................................................................................................................................................282
5.21 Spanning-Tree Commands ........................................................................................................................................284
5.21.1 spanning-tree...................................................................................................................................................284
5.21.2 spanning-tree mode.........................................................................................................................................284
5.21.3 spanning-tree forward-time..............................................................................................................................285
5.21.4 spanning-tree hello-time ..................................................................................................................................285
5.21.5 spanning-tree max-age....................................................................................................................................286
5.21.6 spanning-tree priority .......................................................................................................................................287
5.21.7 spanning-tree disable ......................................................................................................................................287
5.21.8 spanning-tree cost ...........................................................................................................................................288
5.21.9 spanning-tree port-priority................................................................................................................................289
5.21.10 spanning-tree portfast....................................................................................................................................289
5.21.11 spanning-tree link-type...................................................................................................................................290
5.21.12 spanning-tree bpdu........................................................................................................................................291
5.21.13 clear spanning-tree detected-protocols..........................................................................................................292
5.21.14 show spanning-tree .......................................................................................................................................292
5.22 SSH and SLOGIN Commands...................................................................................................................................294
5.22.1 ip ssh port ........................................................................................................................................................294
5.22.2 ip ssh server ....................................................................................................................................................295
5.22.3 crypto key generate dsa ..................................................................................................................................296
5.22.4 crypto key generate rsa ...................................................................................................................................296
5.22.5 ip ssh pubkey-auth ..........................................................................................................................................297
5.22.6 crypto key pubkey-chain ssh ...........................................................................................................................297
5.22.7 user-key...........................................................................................................................................................298
5.22.8 key-string .........................................................................................................................................................299
5.22.9 show ip ssh......................................................................................................................................................300
5.22.10 show crypto key mypubkey............................................................................................................................301
5.22.11 show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh ................................................................................................................301
5.23 System Management.................................................................................................................................................302
5.23.1 ping..................................................................................................................................................................302
5.23.2 traceroute ........................................................................................................................................................303
5.23.3 telnet................................................................................................................................................................306
5.23.4 resume.............................................................................................................................................................308
5.23.5 reload...............................................................................................................................................................309
5.23.6 hostname.........................................................................................................................................................310
-10-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.23.7 show users ......................................................................................................................................................310
5.23.8 show sessions ................................................................................................................................................. 311
5.23.9 show system....................................................................................................................................................312
5.23.10 show version..................................................................................................................................................313
5.24 Syslog Commands.....................................................................................................................................................313
5.24.1 logging on ........................................................................................................................................................313
5.24.2 logging .............................................................................................................................................................314
5.24.3 logging console................................................................................................................................................315
5.24.4 logging buffered ...............................................................................................................................................316
5.24.5 logging buffered size........................................................................................................................................316
5.24.6 clear logging ....................................................................................................................................................317
5.24.7 logging file .......................................................................................................................................................317
5.24.8 clear logging file...............................................................................................................................................318
5.24.9 show logging....................................................................................................................................................319
5.24.10 show logging file ............................................................................................................................................320
5.24.11 show syslog-servers ......................................................................................................................................321
5.25 TACACS Commands .................................................................................................................................................322
5.25.1 tacacs-server host ...........................................................................................................................................322
5.25.2 tacacs-server key.............................................................................................................................................323
5.25.3 tacacs-server timeout ......................................................................................................................................323
5.25.4 tacacs-server source-ip ...................................................................................................................................324
5.25.5 show tacacs .....................................................................................................................................................325
5.26 User Interface Commands .........................................................................................................................................326
5.26.1 enable..............................................................................................................................................................326
5.26.2 disable .............................................................................................................................................................327
5.26.3 configure..........................................................................................................................................................327
5.26.4 login .................................................................................................................................................................328
5.26.5 exit(configuration) ............................................................................................................................................328
5.26.6 exit(EXEC).......................................................................................................................................................329
5.26.7 end ..................................................................................................................................................................329
5.26.8 help..................................................................................................................................................................330
5.26.9 history ..............................................................................................................................................................330
5.26.10 history size.....................................................................................................................................................331
5.26.11 show history...................................................................................................................................................331
5.26.12 show privilege................................................................................................................................................332
5.27 VLAN Commands ......................................................................................................................................................333
5.27.1 vlan database ..................................................................................................................................................333
5.27.2 vlan ..................................................................................................................................................................333
5.27.3 default-vlan disable..........................................................................................................................................334
5.27.4 interface vlan ...................................................................................................................................................335
-11-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.27.5 interface range vlan .........................................................................................................................................335
5.27.6 name................................................................................................................................................................336
5.27.7 switchport mode ..............................................................................................................................................336
5.27.8 switchport access vlan.....................................................................................................................................337
5.27.9 switchport trunk allowed vlan...........................................................................................................................338
5.27.10 switchport trunk native vlan ...........................................................................................................................339
5.27.11 switchport general allowed vlan .....................................................................................................................339
5.27.12 switchport general pvid ..................................................................................................................................340
5.27.13 switchport general ingress-filtering disable ....................................................................................................341
5.27.14 switchport general acceptable-frame-type taggedonly...................................................................................341
5.27.15 switchport forbidden vlan ...............................................................................................................................342
5.27.16 map protocol protocols-group ........................................................................................................................343
5.27.17 switchport general map protocols-group vlan ................................................................................................344
5.27.18 ip internal-usage-vlan ....................................................................................................................................344
5.27.19 show vlan.......................................................................................................................................................345
5.27.20 show vlan internal usage ...............................................................................................................................346
5.27.21 show interfaces switchport.............................................................................................................................346
5.28 Web Server Commands.............................................................................................................................................348
5.28.1 ip http server....................................................................................................................................................348
5.28.2 ip http port........................................................................................................................................................348
5.28.3 ip https server ..................................................................................................................................................349
5.28.4 ip https port......................................................................................................................................................350
5.28.5 crypto certificate generate ...............................................................................................................................350
5.28.6 show ip http .....................................................................................................................................................351
5.28.7 show ip https....................................................................................................................................................351
5.29 802.1x Commands.....................................................................................................................................................352
5.29.1 aaa authentication dot1x..................................................................................................................................352
5.29.2 dot1x system-auth-control ...............................................................................................................................353
5.29.3 dot1x port-control.............................................................................................................................................353
5.29.4 dot1x re-authentication ....................................................................................................................................354
5.29.5 dot1x timeout re-authperiod.............................................................................................................................355
5.29.6 dot1x re-authenticate .......................................................................................................................................355
5.29.7 dot1x timeout quiet-period ...............................................................................................................................356
5.29.8 dot1x timeout tx-period ....................................................................................................................................357
5.29.9 dot1x max-req..................................................................................................................................................358
5.29.10 dot1x timeout supp-timeout ...........................................................................................................................358
5.29.11 dot1x timeout server-timeout .........................................................................................................................359
5.29.12 show dot1x ....................................................................................................................................................360
5.29.13 show dot1x users...........................................................................................................................................362
5.29.14 show dot1x statistics......................................................................................................................................363
-12-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.29.15 dot1x auth-not-req .........................................................................................................................................364
5.29.16 dot1x multiple-hosts.......................................................................................................................................365
5.29.17 dot1x single-host-violation .............................................................................................................................366
5.29.18 show dot1x advanced ....................................................................................................................................366
TROUBLE SHOOTING.............................................................................................................................................................368
APPENDEX A ...........................................................................................................................................................................369
A.1 Switch's RJ-45 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................................................369
A.2 RJ-45 cable pin assignment ........................................................................................................................................369
A.3 Available Modules .......................................................................................................................................................371
-13-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
1. INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing PLANET WGSW Gigabit Managed Switch- WGSW-24020 and WGSW-48040. In the following section,
the term “Switch” means the two Switches, i.e. WGSW-24020 and WGSW-48040; term of “switch” can be any third part
switches.
1.1 Packet Contents
Check the contents of your package for following parts:
• The WGSW Managed Switch x1
• CD-ROM user's manual x1
• Quick installation guide x1
• 19" rack mounting kit x1
• Power Cord x1
• RS-232 console x 1
• Rubber feet x 4
If any of these are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer immediately, if possible, retain the carton including the
original packing material, and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair.
1.2 How to Use This Manual
This User Manual is structured as follows:
• Section 2, Installation
The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Switch.
• Section 3, Configuration
The section contains the information about the software function of the Switch.
• Section 4, Web Configuration
The section explains how to manage the Switch by Web interface.
• Section 5, COMMAND STRUCTURE
The section explains how to manage the Switch by Console interface..
• Appendex A
The section contains cable information of the Switch.
-14-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
1.3 Product Feature
¾
Physical Port
WGSW-24020
…
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
…
2 SFP slots, shared with Port#12 and Port#24
…
Console interface for Switch basic management and setup
WGSW-48040
¾
…
48-Port 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
…
4 SFP slots, shared with Port#23, Port#24, Port#47 and Port#48
…
Console interface for Switch basic management and setup
Layer 2 Features
…
Complies with the IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, IEEE 802.3ab, IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard
…
Supports Auto-negotiation and half duplex/full duplex modes for all 10Base-T/100Base-TX and 1000Base-T ports.
…
Auto-MDI/MDI-X detection on each RJ-45 port
…
Prevents packet loss with back pressure (Half-Duplex) and IEEE 802.3x PAUSE frame flow control (Full-Duplex)
…
High performance Store and Forward architecture, broadcast storm control, runt/CRC filtering eliminates erroneous
packets to optimize the network bandwidth
¾
¾
¾
…
8K MAC address table, automatic source address learning and ageing
…
6Mbit embedded memory for packet buffers
…
Supports IEEE 802.1Q Tagged based VLAN
…
GVRP protocol for VLAN Management
…
Support up to 8 Trunk groups, each trunk for up to maximum 8 port with 1.6Gbps bandwidth (Duplex Mode)
…
IEEE802.1d, IEEE802.1w, classic Spanning Tree Algorithm or Rapid Spanning Tree support
…
Supports the IEEE 802.1s specification for multiple spanning trees on a single port (spanning tree per VLAN).
Quality of Service
…
4 priority queues on all switch ports.
…
Support for strict priority and weighted round robin (WRR) CoS policies
…
Support QoS and bandwidth control on each port
…
Traffic-policing policies on the switch port
Multicast
…
Support IGMP Snooping v1 and v2
…
Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port
Security
…
802.1x Port-Based Authentication
…
IP-Based Access Control List (ACL)
…
MAC-Based Access Control List
…
Port Security
-15-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Management
…
WEB-Based, Telnet, Console Command Line management
…
SSH( Secure Shell), SSL
…
Access through SNMPv1, v2c and v3 security set and gets requests.
…
Four groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events) of embedded remote monitoring (RMON) agents for network
monitoring and traffic analysis
…
Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client
…
Virtual Cable Test (VCT) technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues, such as
cable opens, cable shorts, etc. on Copper Links
…
EMI standards comply with FCC, CE class A
1.4 Product Specification
Products
Description
WGSW-24020
WGSW-48040
24-Port 10/100/1000Mbps with 2 Shared
48-Port 10/100/1000Mbps with 4
SFP Managed Gigabit Switch
Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch
Hardware Specification
10/100/1000Base-T Ports
SFP/mini-GBIC Slots
24 RJ-45 Auto-MDI/MDI-X ports
48 RJ-45 Auto-MDI/MDI-X ports
2 SFP interfaces
4 SFP interfaces
( Shared with Port#12 and Port#24 )
( Shared with Port#23, 24, 47 and 48 )
Switch Architecture
Store-and-Forward
Switch Fabric
48Gbps
96Gbps
Switch Throughput
35.7Mpps / Wire-Speed
71.4Mpps / Wire-Speed
Address Table
8K entries
Share data Buffer
6 Mbit
Flow Control
Back pressure for Half-Duplex, IEEE 802.3x Pause Frame for Full-Duplex
Jumbo Frame
9K bytes per 10/100/1000Base-T Ports
Dimension
430 x 350 x 44.5mm (W x D x H), 1U height
Weight
3.4 KG
Power Requirement
100~240V AC, 50-60, Auto-sensing
3.5KG
Layer 2 function
Management Interface
Console. Telnet, SSH, Web Browser, SSL, SNMPv1, v2c and v3
Port disable/enable. Auto-negotiation 10/100Mbps full and half duplex mode selection.
Port configuration
Flow Control disable / enable. Bandwidth control on each port.
Display each port’s speed duplex mode, link status, Flow control status.
Port Status
VLAN
Auto negotiation status, trunk status.
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged Based VLAN ,up to 255 VLAN groups
-16-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Link Aggregation
Supports 8 groups of 8-Port trunk support, IEEE 802.3ad LACP
Traffic classification based on Port Number, 802.1p priority and DS/TOS field in IP
QoS
IGMP Snooping
Packet
Allow to be disabled or enable. Supports IGMP Snooping v1 and v2
RFC-1213 MIB-2
RFC-2863 Interface MIB
RFC-2665 EtherLike MIB
RFC-1493 Bridge MIB
SNMP MIBs
RFC-2674 Extended Bridge MIB
RFC-2819 RMON MIB (Group 1, 2, 3 and 9)
RFC-2737 Entity MIB
RFC-2618 RADIUS Client MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulation Compliance
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX
IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back pressure
Standards Compliance
IEEE 802.3ad Port trunk with LACP
IEEE 802.1d Spanning tree protocol
IIEEE 802.1w Rapid spanning tree protocol
IEEE 802.1p Class of service
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging
Environment
Regulation Compliance
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
Operating Temperature
0℃~50℃,
Storage Temperature
-40℃~70℃,
Operating Humidity
5% to 90%, relative humidity, non-condensing
Storage Humidity
5% to 90%, relative humidity, non-condensing
-17-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
2. INSTALLATION
This section describes the functionalities of the Switch's components and guides how to install it on the desktop or shelf. Basic
knowledge of networking is assumed. Please read this chapter completely before continuing.
2.1 Product Description
The PLANET WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 is a 24/48-Port 10/100/1000Mbps with 2/4 shared SFP interfaces Gigabit Ethernet
Switch. It boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non-blocking switch fabric and wire-speed
throughput as high as 48Gbps and 96Gbps. Its two/four built-in GbE uplink ports also offer incredible extensibility, flexibility and
connectivity to the Core switch or Servers.
2.1.1 Product Overview
PLANET WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services
offered by telecom. It provides 4 priority queues per port for different types of traffic, allowing administrators to set policies for
classified filtering and rule-based rate limitation. The WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 prioritizes applications with WFQ (Weighted
Fair Queuing) scheduling algorithm to allocate more bandwidth to key traffics such as voice transmission, empowering the
enterprise to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantee the best performance.
PLANET WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 offers comprehensive Access Control List (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. Its
protection mechanisms comprised of port-based 802.1x user and device authentication. The administrators can now construct
highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less then before.
With
its
built-in
web-based
management,
the
PLANET
WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
offers
an
easy-to-use,
platform-independent management and configuration facility. The PLANET WGSW-24020 /WGSW-48040 support standard
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and can be managed via any standard-based management software. For
text-based management, the WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 can also be accessed via Telnet and the console interfaces. For
secure remote management, the WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 supports SSL and SSH connection which encrypt the packet
content at each session.
2.1.2 Switch Front Panel
Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the Switch.
1
24-Port Gigabit Managed Switch
LNK/ACT
1000Mbps
PWR
LNK/ACT
1000Mbps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10 11 12
Console
mini-GBIC
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
WGSW-24020
mini-GBIC
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
12
38400, N, 8, 1
24
Figure 2-1 WGSW-24020 front panel.
LNK/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ACT
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Console
38400, N, 8,1
mini-GBIC
PWR
48-Port Gigabit Managed Switch
23
Figure 2-2 WGSW-48040 front panel.
-18-
24
47
48
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
2.1.3 LED Indications
2.1.3.1 WGSW-24020 LED Indications
■
■
System
LED
Color
PWR
Green
Function
Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
Per Per 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 port /SFP interfaces ( Shared with 10/100/1000Base-T Port#12 and Port#24)
LED
Color
LNK/ACT
Green
1000
Function
Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established.
Blink: indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed.
Orange
Off: indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
2.1.3.2 WGSW-48040 LED Indications
■
■
System
LED
Color
PWR
Green
Function
Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
Per 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 port
LED
Color
Function
Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed.
LNK/ACT
Orange
(Dual Color)
Lights: indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
Green
■
Blink: indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Blink: indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Per SFP interfaces ( Shared with 10/100/1000Base-T Port#23, Port#24, Port#47 and Port#48)
LED
Color
LNK/ACT
Orange
Function
Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established.
Blink: indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
2.1.4 Switch Rear Panel
Figure 2-3 and 2-4 shows the rear panel of the Switch
100 ~ 240V AC
50 / 60 Hz
Figure 2-3 WGSW-24020 rear panel.
-19-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Figure 2-4 WGSW-48040 rear panel.
Power Notice:
1.
The device is a power-required device, it means, it will not work till it is powered. If your networks should active all the
time, please consider using UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) for your device. It will prevent you from network data
loss or network downtime.
2.
In some area, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your switch from being damaged by
unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter.
2.2 Install the Switch
This section describes how to install the Ethernet Switch and make connections to the Switch. Please read the following topics
and perform the procedures in the order being presented. To install your Switch on a desktop or shelf, simply complete the
following steps.
2.2.1 Desktop Installation
To install the Switch on desktop or shelf, please follows these steps:
Step1: Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Switch.
Step2: Place the Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source.
Step3: Keep enough ventilation space between the Switch and the surrounding objects.
#Notice:
When choosing a location, please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter
1, Section 4, and Specification.
Step4: Connect the Switch to network devices.
A.
Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10/100 RJ-45 ports or Gigabit RJ-45 / SFP mini-GBIC slot on the
front of the Switch.
B.
Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers, workstations or routers…etc.
#Notice:
Connection to the Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ-45 tips. For more
information, please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A.
Step5: Supply power to the Switch.
A.
Connect one end of the power cable to the Switch.
B.
Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet.
When the Switch receives power, the Power LED should remain solid Green.
-20-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
2.2.2 Rack Mounting
To install the Switch in a 19-inch standard rack, please follows the instructions described below.
Step1: Place the Switch on a hard flat surface, with the front panel positioned towards the front side.
Step2: Attach the rack-mount bracket to each side of the Switch with supplied screws attached to the package. Figure 2-5
shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Switch.
Figure 2-5 Attach brackets to the Switch.
Caution:
You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets. Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws
would invalidate the warranty.
Step3: Secure the brackets tightly.
Step4: Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side.
Step5: After the brackets are attached to the Switch, use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack, as shown in
Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Mounting the Switch in a Rack
-21-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Step6: Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2.2.1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply
power to the Switch.
2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver
The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot.
The SFP transceivers are hot-pluggabe and hot-swappable. You can plug-in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP port
without having to power down the Switch. As the Figure 2-7 appears.
Figure 2-7 Plug-in the SFP transceiver
Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers
PLANET WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 support both single mode and multi mode SFP transceiver. The following list of
approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication:
■MGB-SX SFP (1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver )
■MGB-LX SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver )
#Notice:
It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Switch. If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not
supported, the Switch will not recognize it.
Before connect the other switches, workstation or Media Converter.
1.
Make sure both side of the SFP transfer are with the same media type, for example: 1000Base-SX to 1000Base-SX,
1000Bas-LX to 1000Base-LX.
2.
Check the fiber-optic cable type match the SFP transfer model.
¾
To connect to 1000Base-SX SFP transfer, use the multi-mode fiber cable- with one side must be male duplex LC
connector type.
¾
To connect to 1000Base-LX SFP transfer, use the single-mode fiber cable-with one side must be male duplex LC
connector type.
-22-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Connect the fiber cable
1.
Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to a device – switches with SFP installed, fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media
Converter.
3.
Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Switch. Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly.
4.
Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed. Co works with some fiber-NICs or Media Converters, set the Link
mode to “1000 Force” is needed.
Remove the transceiver module
1.
Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator. Or through the management
interface of the switch/converter (if available) to disable the port in advance.
2.
Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently.
3.
Turn the handle of the MGB/MFB module to horizontal.
4.
Pull out the module gently through the handle.
Figure 2-8 Pull out the SFP transceiver
#Notice:
Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module. Direct pull out the
module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the device.
-23-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
3. CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Switch. It describes the types of
management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management
device (work-station or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection options.
This chapter covers the following topics:
ƒ
Management Access Overview
ƒ
Key Concepts
ƒ
Key Guidelines for Implementation
ƒ
Administration Console Access
ƒ
Web Management Access
ƒ
SNMP Access
ƒ
Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading
3.1 Management Access Overview
The Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage the Switch using any or all of the following methods:
ƒ
An administration console
ƒ
Web browser interface
ƒ
An external SNMP-based network management application
The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Switch software and are available for
immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three management
methods.
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Console
‧No IP address or subnet needed.
‧Must be near switch or use dial-up connection.
‧Text-based.
‧Not convenient for remote users.
‧Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built
‧Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow.
into Windows 95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP
operating systems.
‧Secure.
Web
‧Ideal for configuring the switch remotely.
Browser
‧Compatible with all popular browsers.
‧Security can be compromised (hackers need only know the IP
address and subnet mask).
‧Can be accessed from any location.
‧May encounter lag times on poor connections.
‧Most visually appealing.
SNMP
Agent
‧Communicates with switch functions at the
‧Requires SNMP manager software.
‧Least visually appealing of all three methods.
MIB level.
‧Based on open standards.
‧Some settings require calculations.
‧Security can be compromised (hackers need only know the
community name).
Table 3-1 Management Methods Comparison
-24-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
3.1.1 Administration Console
The administration console is an internal, character-oriented, and command line user interface for performing system
administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings. Using this method, you can view the administration
console from a terminal, personal computer, Apple Macintosh, or workstation connected to the switch's console (serial) port.
There are two ways to use this management method: via direct access or modem port access. The following sections describe
these methods. For more information about using the console, refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console
Management.
3.1.2 Direct Access
Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a
terminal-emulation program (such as HyperTerminal) to the Switch console (serial) port.
When using this management method, a null-modem cable is required to connect the Switch to the PC. After making this
connection, configure the terminal-emulation program to use the following parameters:
The default parameters are:
ƒ
38400 bps
ƒ
8 data bits
ƒ
No parity
ƒ
1 stop bit
You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can
remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port,
regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any
terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator
such as TIP.
3.2 Web Management
The Switch provides a browser interface that lets you configure and manage the switch remotely. After you set up your IP
address for the Switch, you can access the Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP
address of the Switch. You can then use your Web browser to list and manage Switch configuration parameters from one central
location, just as if you were directly connected to the Switch's console port.
Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or later or Netscape Navigator 4.03 or later.
-25-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
3.3 SNMP-Based Network Management
You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Switch. This management method requires the
SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management
method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Net-work
management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get
community string, it can only read MIBs. The default gets and sets community strings for the Switch are public.
3.4 Protocols
The Switch supports the following protocols:
ƒ
Virtual terminal protocols, such as Telnet
ƒ
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
3.4.1 Virtual Terminal Protocols
A virtual terminal protocol is a software program, such as Telnet, that allows you to establish a management session from a
Macintosh, a PC, or a UNIX workstation. Because Telnet runs over TCP/IP, you must have at least one IP address configured on
the switch before you can establish access to it with a virtual terminal protocol.
#Notice:
Terminal emulation differs from a virtual terminal protocol in that you must connect a terminal directly
to the console (serial) port.
3.4.2 SNMP Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the standard management protocol for multi-vendor IP networks. SNMP
supports transaction-based queries that allow the protocol to format messages and to transmit information between reporting
devices and data-collection programs. SNMP runs on top of the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), offering a connectionless-mode
service.
3.4.3 Management Architecture
All of the management application modules use the same Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI). By unifying
management methods with a single MAPI, configuration parameters set using one method (console port, for example) are
immediately displayable by the other management methods (for example, SNMP agent of Web browser).
The management architecture of the Switch adheres to the IEEE open standard. This compliance assures customers that the
Switch is compatible with, and will interoperate with other solutions that adhere to the same open standard.
-26-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4. Web Configuration
The WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 can be configured through an Ethernet connection, make sure the manager PC must be set
on same the IP subnet address with the switch. For example, if you have changed the default IP address of the Switch to
192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via console, then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a
number between 1 and 253) with subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Or you can use the factory default IP address 192.168.1.254 to
do the relative configuration on manager PC. The sceen in Figure 4-1 appears.
Figure 4-1 Web Management via Ethernet
„
1.
Logging on the switch
Use Internet Explorer 5.0 or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface. The
factory-default IP Address as following:
http://192.168.1.254
2.
When the following login screen appears, the system will ask you to enter the username and password.
Default User name: admin
Default Password: admin
The login screen in Figure 4-2 appears.
#Notice:
The following section will base on the screens of WGSW-24020, for WGSW-24020 the display will be the same to
WGSW-48040.
-27-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Figure 4-2 Switch Web Login screen
3.
After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Switch Web Main Screen
Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the Switch management or manage the Switch by
console interface.
#Notice:
It is recommended to use Internet Explore 6.0 or above to access WGSW-Switch.
-28-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.1 Main Screen
The Switch provide Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing the Switch. This interface allows you to access
the Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the Switch’s Web browser interface to
configure and manage the Switch.
Main Functions Menu
Sub Menu
Port Link Status
Main Screen
Description
Figure 4-4 Switch Web Main Screen
Save Config
Via the Web-Management, the administrator can setup the WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 by select the functions those listed in
the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-5 appears.
Figure 4-5 Switch Main Functions Menu
The following functions can be configured here:
„
Setup
„
Port Config
„
VLAN Config
„
Statistics
„
ACL
„
Security
„
QoS
„
Spanning Tree
-29-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
Multicast
„
SNMP
„
Admin
4.2 Setup
The Setup menus include the tree sub-menus:
„
Summary
„
Network Settings
„
Time
4.2.1 Summary
The summary screen provides Device and System Information about the Switch.
Figure 4-6 Switch System Summary screen
The page contains the following informations:
„
Device Information
System Name
Display the system name.
IP Address
Display the current IP address of the device.
Subnet Mask
Display the subnet mask address of the device.
DNS Servers
Display the current DNS Servers, no matter by manual setting or assigned by
the DHCP server.
Default Gateway
Display the current default gateway of the device.
-30-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
Address Mode
Show the IP Address mode of the system – By Static or Dynamic (DHCP).
Base MAC Address
Display the MAC address of the Switch.
System Information
Serial Number
The unique box serial number for this Switch.
Model Name
The product name of this Switch.
Hardware Version
The release version maintenance number of the hardware.
Boot Version
The version of boot system currently running on the Switch.
Firmware Version
The version of operating system currently running on the Switch.
System Location
Display where the Switch is located.
System Contact
Display the administrative contact person.
System Up Time
The time in days, hours and minutes since the last Switch reboot.
Current Time
Specifies the time and date. The format is hour, minute, second, month, day,
year.
]
-31-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.2.2 Network Settings
The Basic Setup Table include the Network Settings (see figure 4-7), which allows you to assign DHCP or static IP settings to
interfaces and assign default gateways. In the Networking Setting screen, you can set these parts as below:
Figure 4-7 Switch Network Setting screen
The page includes the following fields:
„
„
Identification:
System Name
Input the system name.
System Location
Input the location where the Switch is located.
System Contact
Input the administrative contact person.
System Object ID
The system object identifier is in this field.
Base MAC Address
Display the MAC address of the Switch.
IP Configuration:
Management VLAN
Allow to select the Management VLAN, the default Managemanet VLAN is VLAN 1.
IP Address Mode
Where select Static or Dynamic IP address configuration, the Default Mode is Static.
Host Name
This field allows input the DHCP Host Name.
IP Address
Allow input the IP address for a static address, the default IP Address is
192.168.1.254.
-32-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Subnet Mask
Allow to input the IP subnet mask address, the factory default value is 255.255.255.0
Deafault Gateway
Allow to input the default gateway address, the factory default value is 0.0.0.0
DNS Server
Allow to input the IP Address for the DNS Server. The Domain Name System (DNS)
converts user-defined domain names into IP addresses.
4.2.3 Time
In the Basic Setup Table, you can see the Time Setup (see figure 4-8), by which you can configure the time settings for the
Switch. You can select SNTP Servers: Server1 for the primary SNTP server and Server2 for the secondary SNTP server.
Figure 4-8 Switch Time screen
The Time page includes the following fields:
„
„
Set Time
Use System Time
Specifies that the system time is not set by an external source but the Local time settings.
Use SNTP Time
Specifies that the system time is set via an SNTP server.
Local Time
-33-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Hours / Minuntes / Seconds Defines the system time. The field format is HH:MM:SS, for example, 21:15:03.
„
Month / Day / Year
Defines the system date. The field format is Day:Month:Year, for example, 04 May
2007.
Time Zone
The difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and local time. For example,
the Time Zone Offset for Paris is GMT +1, while the local time in Taipei is GTM +8.
Daylight Saving
Daylight Saving
Enables the Daylight Savings Time (DST) on the device based on the devices location.
The possible field values are:
• USA -- The device switches to DST at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of April, and reverts
to standard time at 2 a.m. on the last Sunday of October.
• European -- The device switches to DST at 1:00 am on the last Sunday in March
and reverts to standard time at 1:00 am on the last Sunday in October. The
European option applies to EU members, and other European countries using the
EU standard.
• Other -- The DST definitions are user-defined based on the device locality. If Other is
selected, the From and To fields must be defined.
Time Set Offset
For non USA and European countries, the amount of time for DST can be set in minutes.
The value range is (1-1440).
The default time is 60 minutes.
From
Defines the time that DST begins in countries other than USA or Europe, in the format
DayMonthYear in one field and time in another. For example, DST begins on the 25th
October 2007 5:00 am, the two fields will be 25Oct07 and 5:00. The possible field values
are:
• Date -- The date at which DST begins. The possible field range is 1-31.
• Month -- The month of the year in which DST begins. The possible field range is
Jan-Dec.
• Year-- The year in which the configured DST begins.
• Time -- The time at which DST begins. The field format is Hour:Minute, for example,
05:30.
To
Defines the time that DST ends in countries other than USA or European in the format
DayMonthYear in one field and time in another. For example, DST ends on the 23rd March
2008 12:00 am, the two fields will be 23Mar08 and 12:00. The possible field values are:
• Date -- The date at which DST ends. The possible field range is 1-31.
• Month -- The month of the year in which DST ends. The possible field range is
Jan-Dec.
• Year-- The year in which the configured DST ends.
• Time -- The time at which DST starts. The field format is Hour:Minute, for example,
05:30.
Recurring
Defines the time that DST starts in countries other than USA or Europe where the DST is
constant year to year. The possible field values are:
From
Defines the time that DST begins each year. For example, DST begins locally every
second Sunday in April at 5:00 am. The possible field values are:
• Day -- The day of the week from which DST begins every year. The possible field
range is Sunday-Saturday.
• Week -- The week within the month from which DST begins every year. The possible
field range is 1-5.
• Month -- The month of the year in which DST begins every year. The possible field
-34-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
range is Jan.-Dec.
• Time -- The time at which DST begins every year. The field format is Hour:Minute, for
example, 02:10.
To
Defines the recurring time that DST ends each year. For example, DST ends locally every
fourth Friday in October at 5:00 am. The possible field values are:
• Day -- The day of the week at which DST ends every year. The possible field range is
Sunday-Saturday.
• Week -- The week within the month at which DST ends every year. The possible field
range is 1-5.
• Month -- The month of the year in which DST ends every year. The possible field
range is Jan.-Dec.
• Time -- The time at which DST ends every year. The field format is Hour:Minute, for
example, 05:30.
„
SNTP Server
Server1
Enter a user-defined SNTP server IP addresses or hostname. Up to twot SNTP servers can be
defined. The primary server provides SNTP information.
Server2
The backup server provides SNTP information.
Poll Interval
Defines the interval (in seconds) at which the SNTP server is polled for Unicast information.
The factory default value is 1024.
(60-86400 sec)
The Switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP assures accurate
Notice: network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. Time synchronization is
performed by a network SNTP server. SNTP operates only as a client, and cannot provide time
services to other systems.
#
-35-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.3 Port Configuration
In this field, you can see these parts, such as port settings, Link aggregation, LACP.
4.3.1 Port settings
To use the port settings screen for setting up each of the switch’s ports. It shows these parts: port, description, admin status, link
status, speed, duplex, MDI/MDIX, Flow control, type, LAG, PVE (see Figure 4-9):
Figure 4-9 Switch Port Settings screen
The Port Settings screen contains the following fields:
Port
Description
Administrative Status
Link Status
Speed
Duplex
MDI/ MDIX
Flow control
Shows the port number. You can click on the Detail button of the appropriate port
(G1, G2) to use an SFP module, and the Detail button shows the Port
Configuration Detail screen, which include port, description, port type, admin
status, current port status ……
Click up the Detail button to make a brief description of the port.
When to choose the UP button, the port can be accessed normally, to choose the
Down button, the port will be taken offline.
Shows an active connection when you choose the UP button, there is no active
connection or the port has been taken offline by an Admiinistrator when you
choose the Down button.
Shows the connection speed of the port and the speed can be configured only
when auto-negotiation is disabled on that port.
The port duplex mode, Full (transmission occurs in both directions
simultaneously) or Half (transmission occurs in only one direction at a time). This
mode can be configured only when auto-negotiation is disabled and port speed is
set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps. It cannot be configured on Link Aggregation
Groups (LAGs).
Shows the MDI/MDIX status of the port. To use the MDI setting if the port is
connected to an end station. To use the MDIX setting if the port is connected to a
hub or another switch.
Shows the flow control status of the port. It is active when the port uses Full
Duplex Mode.
-36-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Type
LAG
PVE
Detail
Shows the port type.
Shows whether the port is part of a LAG.
It bypasses the Forwarding Database and forwards all unicast, multicast, and
broadcast traffic to an uplink when a port is a Private VLAN Edge (PVE) port,
Uplinks can be ports or LAGs.
It will open the port configuration detail screen.
Click the Detail button for more detail port configuration, the Port Configuration Detail screen (see figure 4-10)
Figure 4-10 Per Port Configuration detail screen
The Port Configuration screen contains the following fields:
Port
Description
Port Type
Admin Status
Current Port Status
Reactivate Suspended Port
Indicates the number of each port.
Where can be entered by clicking on the Detail button.
Display the port type of each port.
The port can be taken offline by selecting the Down option. When Up is selected, the
port can be accessed normally.
Display current status of the each port.
To reactivate a port that has been suspended, click the check box.
-37-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Operational Status
Admin Speed
Current Port Speed
Admin Duplex
Current Duplex Mode
Auto Negotiation
Current Auto Negotiation
Admin Advertisement
Current Advertisement
Neighbor Advertisement
Back Pressure
Current Back Pressure
Flow Control
Current Flow Control
MDI/ MDIX
Current MDI/MDIX
PVE
This indicates the port is active or not.
Change the speed of each port.
Display current speed of each port.
Change the duplex mode of each port.
Display current duplex mode of each port.
Allow enable or disable per port’s Auto Negotiation feature. If using an SFP module,
Auto Negotiation for the specific port should be set to disable.
Display current setting of the port’s Auto Negotiation status.
Specifies the capabilities to be advertised by the port. Multiple options may be
selected or Max Capability can be selected to cover all of the options.
The available options are:
Max Capability, which indicates that the port speeds and duplex mode settings can
be accepted.
10 Half, indicates that the port is advertising a 10Mbps half duplex mode setting.
10 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 10Mbps full duplex mode setting.
100 Half, indicates that the port is advertising a 100Mbps half duplex mode setting.
100 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 100Mbps full duplex mode setting.
1000 Full, indicates that the port is advertising a 1000Mbps full duplex mode
setting.
The port advertises its capabilities to its neighbor port to begin the negotiation
process. This field displays the current advertisement settings.
Tthe neighbor port (the port to which the selected interface is connected) advertises
its capabilities to the port to start the negotiation process. This field displays the
neighbor’s current settings.
The Back Pressure feature of the selected port can be enabled or disabled.
Displays whether Back Pressure is enabled or disabled on the currently selected port
The Flow Control feature of the selected port can be enabled or disabled.
Displays whether Flow Control is enabled or disabled on the currently selected port.
• Auto - the port to automatically detect the cable type.
• MDI - if the port is connected to an end station.
• MDIX - if the port is connected to a hub or another switch
Display the current MDI/MDIX status on each port.
For Gigabit Ethernet switches ONLY. When a port is a Private VLAN Edge (PVE) port,
it bypasses the Forwarding Database and forwards all unicast, multicast, and
broadcast traffic to an uplink. Uplinks can be ports or LAGs.
After setup complete, please click the Save button to save your changes.
4.3.2 Link Aggregation
When you enter the Link Aggregation, the screen appears in figure 4-11, such as: LAG, shows whether the port is part of a LAG.
-38-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Figure 4-11 Switch Link Aggregation screen
The Link Aggregation page contains the following fields:
LAG
Indicates the number of the LAG interface. Up to eight LAG interfaces can be configured.
Description
Admin Status
Indicates the description of the LAG ports.
Up indicates that the port is available and down shows administrator has taken the port offline.
after setup completed, please click the Save Settings option to save current setting.
The port types that comprise the LAG.
Type
Link Status
Speed
Duplex
Flow control
LAG Mode
Shows an active connection when you choose the UP button, there is no active connection or
the port has been taken offline by an Admiinistrator when you choose the Down button.
Shows the connection speed on each port and the speed can be configured only when
auto-negotiation is disabled on that port.
The port duplex mode, Full (transmission occurs in both directions simultaneously) or Half
(transmission occurs in only one direction at a time). This mode can be configured only when
auto-negotiation is disabled and port speed is set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
Shows the flow control status of the port. It is active when the port runs at Full Duplex Mode.
Shows the current mode of the LAG interface.
Click the Detail button for more detail port configuration.
„
Linkl Aggregation detail configuration
At per-LAG detail configuration page, the administrator can select ports to be the members of the LAG interface. The screen
-39-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
appears as follow:
Figure 4-12 Switch per Link Aggregation screen
4.3.3 LACP
Aggregated Links can be manually setup or automatically established on the relevant links by enabling Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP). Aggregate ports can be linked into link-aggregation port-groups. Each group is comprised of ports with the
same speed, set to full-duplex operation, the LACP screen contains fields for configuring LACP LAGs (see figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13 Switch LACP configuration screen
The page contains the following fields:
-40-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
LACP System Priority Indicates the global LACP priority value. The possible range is 1- 65535 and the default value is 1.
Port
Set the port number which need to timeout and the priority values are assigned.
LACP Port Priority
Where set the LACP priority value for the port and the field range is 1-65535.
LACP Timeout
Administrative LACP timeout. A short or long timeout value can be selected. Long is the default.
Admin Key
A channel will only be formed between ports having the same admin key, in other words, this only
applies to ports located on the same switch.
4.4 VLAN Configuration
A Virtual LAN (VLAN) is a logical network grouping that limits the broadcast domain. It allows you to isolate network traffic so
only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members. Basically, creating a VLAN from a switch is logically
equivalent of reconnecting a group of network devices to another Layer 2 switch. However, all the network devices are still plug
into the same switch physically.
The Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q (tagged-based) and GVRP Dynamic VLAN setting in web management page. In the default
configuration, VLAN support is “802.1Q”.
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the
entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).
VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only
be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast,
multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.
VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are
members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging. The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers. The tagging feature allows VLAN
to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all
ports and work normally.
Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging. The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work
with legacy switches that don’t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers. The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple
802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work
normally.
Frame Income
Income Frame is tagged
Income Frame is untagged
Leave port is tagged
Frame remains tagged
Tag is inserted
Leave port is untagged
Tag is removed
Frame remain untagged
Frame Leave
In this field, there are five items, such as Create VLAN, Port setting, Ports to VLAN, VLAN to Ports, GVRP.
-41-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.4.1 Create VLAN
In this table, the information and global parameters for configuring and working with VLAN s will be provided (see figure 4-14).
Figure 4-14 Switch Create VLAN screen
The page contains the following fields:
„
Single VLAN
VLAN ID (2-4094)
„
You can configure the ID number of the VLAN by this item. Up to 256 VLANs can be
created. This field is used to add VLANs one at a time. If you want to add the defined
VLAN ID number, you can press the Add button.
VLAN Name
Where shows the user-defined VLAN name.
VLAN Range
Indicates a range of VLANs configured. To add the defined range of VLAN ID numbers,
press the Add Range button.
VLAN Table
The VLAN Table displays a list of all configured VLANs, include the
• VLAN ID,
• VLAN Name,
• Status
To remove a VLAN, click the Remove button.
-42-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.4.2 Port setting
In this port setting screen (refer to figure 4-15), the parameters managing ports that are part of a VLAN will be provided, and you
can set the default VLAN ID (PVID). All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.
Figure 4-15 VLAN Port Setting screen
The page contains the following fields:
Port
Mode
Acceptable Frame Type
PVID
Ingress Filtering
LAG
Displays the port number included in the VLAN.
Indicates the port mode. Possible values are:
• General - The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is user-defined as tagged or
untagged (full 802.1Q mode).
• Access - The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a port is in Access
mode, the packet types which are accepted on the port (packet type) cannot be
designated. It is also not possible to enable/ disable ingress filtering on an access
port.
• Trunk - The port belongs to VLANs in which all ports are tagged (except for an
optional single native VLAN).
Packet type accepted on the port. Possible values are:
• Admit Tag Only - indicates that only tagged packets are accepted on the port.
• Admit All - indicates that both tagged and untagged packets are accepted on the
port.
Assigns a VLAN ID to untagged packets. The possible values are 2 to 4094. VLAN 4095 is
defined as per standard and industry practice as the discard VLAN. Packets classified to
the Discard VLAN are dropped.
Enables or disables Ingress filtering on the port. Ingress filtering discards packets which
do not include an ingress port.
Indicates the LAG to which the VLAN is defined.
-43-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Port Mode
Access
VLAN Membership
Frame Leave
Untagged
Belongs to a single untagged VLAN
( Tag=PVID be removed)
Untagged
Allowed to belongs to multiple untagged VLANs at
General
the same time
(Tag=PVID be removed)
Tagged
Allowed to belongs to multiple Tagged VLANs at
Trunk
the same time
(Tag=PVID or Original VID be remained)
4.4.3 Ports to VLAN
The Ports to VLAN screen contains fields for configuring ports to a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the
Create VLAN screen. All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID. The Ports to VLAN screen
contains a Port Table for VLAN parameters for each port. Ports are assigned VLAN membership by selecting and configuring
the presented configuration options, please refer to figure 4-16.
e
Figure 4-16 Ports to VLAN screen
The page contains the following fields:
VLAN
Access
Trunk
General
Tagged
Untagged
Forbidden
Exclude
Where means the VLAN number.
Indicates the port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a port is in Access
mode, the packet types which are accepted on the port cannot be designated.
Ingress filtering cannot be enabled/disabled on an access port.
Which indicates the port belongs to VLANs in which all ports are tagged, except for
one port that can be untagged.
Which indicates the port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is user-defined as
tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode).
Defines the interface as a tagged member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the
interface are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information.
Packets forwarded by the interface are untagged.
Forbidden ports are not included in the VLAN.
Excludes the interface from the VLAN. However, the interface can be added to the
VLAN through GVRP.
-44-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.4.4 GVRP
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) is specifically provided for automatic distribution of VLAN membership information
among VLAN-aware bridges. GVRP allows VLAN-aware bridges to automatically learn VLANs to bridge ports mapping, without
having to individually configure each bridge and register VLAN membership. The Global System LAG information displays the
same field information as the ports, but represents the LAG GVRP information. The GVRP screen (refer to 4-17) is divided into
two areas, GVRP and GVRP Table. The field definitions for both areas are the same.
Figure 4-17 GVRP configuration screen
The page contains the following fields:
Enable GVRP
Interface
Enables and disables GVRP on the device.
Displays the interface on which GVRP is enabled. Possible field values are:
Port - indicates the port number on which GVRP is enabled.
LAG - indicates the LAG number on which GVRP is enabled.
GVRP State
When the checkbox is checked, GVRP is enabled on the interface.
Dynamic VLAN Creation
When the checkbox is checked, Dynamic VLAN creation is enabled on the interface.
GVRP Registration
Update
When the checkbox is checked, VLAN registration through GVRP is enabled on the
device.
The Update button adds the configured GVRP setting to the table at the bottom of the
screen.
-45-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.5 Statistics
The Statistic of the switch, this field includes these parts as below:
4.5.1 RMON Statistics
The RMON Statistics screen (refer to figure 4-18) contains fields for viewing information about device utilization and errors that
occurred on the device.
Figure 4-18 RMON Statistics screen
The page contains the following fields:
Interface
Refresh Rate
Drop Events
Received Bytes (Octets)
Received Packets
Broadcast Packets
Received
Multicast Packets
Received
CRC & Align Errors
Undersize Packets
Oversize Packets
Indicates the device for which statistics are displayed. The possible field values are:
• Port - defines the specific port for which RMON statistics are displayed.
• LAG - defines the specific LAG for which RMON statistics are displayed.
Defines the amount of time that passes before the interface statistics are refreshed. The
possible field values are:
• No Refresh, indicates that the RMON statistics are not refreshed.
• 15 Sec, which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds.
• 30 Sec, which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds.
• 60 Sec, which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds.
which displays the number of dropped events that have occurred on the interface since
the device was last refreshed.
Displays the number of octets received on the interface since the device was last
refreshed. This number includes bad packets and FCS octets, but excludes framing bits.
Displays the number of packets received on the interface, including bad packets,
Multicast and broadcast packets, since the device was last refreshed.
Which displays the number of good broadcast packets received on the interface since
the device was last refreshed. This number does not include Multicast packets.
Displays the number of good Multicast packets received on the interface since the
device was last refreshed.
which displays the number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred on the interface
since the device was last refreshed.
Displays the number of undersized packets (less than 64 octets) received on the
interface since the device was last refreshed.
Displays the number of oversized packets (over 1518 octets) received on the interface
since the device was last refreshed.
-46-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
Frames of xx Bytes
Indicates the number of fragments (packets with less than 64 octets, excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) received on the interface since the device was last
refreshed.
Indicates the total number of received packets that were longer than 1518 octets. This
number excludes frame bits, but includes FCS octets that had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a non-integral octet (Alignment Error) number. The field range to detect jabbers is
between 20 ms and 150 ms.
Displays the number of collisions received on the interface since the device was last
refreshed.
Number of xx-byte frames received on the interface since the device was last refreshed.
Clear Counters button, this option will reset all of the statistic counts.
Refresh Now button, which use this option to refresh the statistics.
4.5.2 RMON History
The RMON History contains information about samples of data taken from ports. For example, the samples may include
interface definitions or polling periods. The RMON History Control screen is divided into RMON History and Log Table.
Log Table includes the following parts (see figure 4-19).
Figure 4-19 RMON History screen
The page contains the following fields:
-47-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
RMON History
• Source Interface
• Sampling Interval
• Sampling
Requested
• Current Number of
Samples
• Owner
Displays the interface from which the history samples were taken. The possible
field values are:
Port, specifies the port from which the RMON information was taken.
LAG, specifies the port from which the RMON information was taken.
Indicates (in seconds) the time that samplings are taken from the ports. The field
range is 1-3600. The default is 1800 seconds (equal to 30 minutes)
Displays the number of samples to be saved. The field range is 1-65535.
The default value is 50.
Displays the current number of samples taken. View History button. This button
opens the RMON History screen.
Where displays the RMON station or user that requested the RMON information.
The field range is 0-20 characters.
Use the Add to List button when you add the configured RMON sampling to the Log Table at the bottom of the screen
„
RMON History Table
The RMON History screen (see figure 4-20) contains interface specific statistical network samplings. Each table entry
represents all counter values compiled during a single sample.
Figure 4-20 RMON History Table screen
-48-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Sample No
Received Bytes (Octets)
Received Packets
Broadcast Packets
Multicast Packets
CRC Align Errors
Undersize Packets
Oversize Packets
Fragments
Jabbers
Indicates the sample number from which the statistics were taken.
Displays the number of octets received on the interface since the device was last
refreshed. This number includes bad packets and FCS octets, but excludes framing bits.
Displays the number of packets received on the interface since the device was last
refreshed, including bad packets, Multicast and Broadcast packets.
Displays the number of good Broadcast packets received on the interface since the
device was last refreshed. This number does not include Multicast packets.
Displays the number of good Multicast packets received on the interface since the
device was last refreshed.
Which displays the number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred on the interface
since the device was last refreshed.
Displays the number of undersized packets (less than 64 octets) received on the
interface since the device was last refreshed.
Displays the number of oversized packets (over 1518 octets) received on the interface
since the device was last refreshed.
Displays the number of fragments (packets with less than 64 octets, excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) received on the interface since the device was last
refreshed.
Displays the total number of received packets that were longer than 1518 octets. This
number excludes frame bits, but includes FCS octets that had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a non-integral octet (Alignment Error) number. The field range to detect jabbers is
between 20 ms and 150 ms.
4.5.3 RMON Alarm
The RMON Alarm screen (see figure 4-21) contains fields for setting network alarms. Network alarms occur when a network
problem, or event, is detected. Rising and falling thresholds generate events.
Figure 4-21 RMON Alarm screen
-49-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Alarm Entry
Source Interface
Counter Name
Sample Type
Rising Threshold
Rising Event
Falling Threshold
Falling Event
Startup Alarm
Interval
Owner
Indicates a specific alarm.
Displays the interface for which RMON statistics are displayed. The possible field
values are:
• Port, displays the selected port of the RMON statistics.
• LAG, displays the RMON statistics for the selected LAG.
Displays the selected MIB variable.
Defines the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value
against the thresholds. The possible field values are:
• Absolute, compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the
sampling interval.
• Delta, subtracts the last sampled value from the current value. The difference in
the values is compared to the threshold.
Displays the rising counter value that triggers the rising threshold alarm. The rising
threshold is presented on top of the graph bars. Each monitored variable is
designated a color.
Displays the mechanism in which the alarms are reported. The possible field values
are:
• LOG. Indicates there is not a saving mechanism for either the device or in the
management system. If the device is not reset, the entry remains in the Log
Table.
• TRAP, indicates that an SNMP trap is generated, and sent via the Trap
mechanism. The Trap can also be saved using the Trap mechanism.
• Both, indicates that both the Log and Trap mechanism are used to report
alarms.
Displays the falling counter value that triggers the falling threshold alarm. The
falling threshold is graphically presented on top of the graph bars. Each monitored
variable is designated a color.
Displays the mechanism in which the alarms are reported. The possible field values
are:
• LOG, indicates there is not a saving mechanism for either the device or in the
management system. If the device is not reset, the entry remains in the Log
Table.
• TRAP, indicates that a SNMP trap is generated, and sent via the Trap
mechanism. The Trap can also be saved using the Trap mechanism.
• Both, indicates that both the Log and Trap mechanism are used to report
alarms.
Displays the trigger that activates the alarm generation. Rising is defined by
crossing the threshold from a low-value threshold to a higher-value threshold.
Defines the alarm interval time in seconds.
Dhere displays the device or user that defined the alarm.
Use the Add to List button when you add the RMON Alarms Table entry.
-50-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.5.4 RMON Events
The RMON Events screen (see figure 4-22) contains fields for defining RMON events.
Figure 4-22 RMON Event screen
The page contains the following fields:
„
Add Event:
Event Entry
Community
Description
Type
Owner
Displays the event.
where displays the community to which the event belongs.
Displays the user-defined event description.
Describes the event type. Possible values are:
• None, where indicates that no event occurred.
• Log, indicates that the event is a log entry.
• Trap, indicates that the event is a trap.
• Log and Trap, indicates that the event is both a log entry and a trap.
Where displays the device or user that defined the event. Use the Add to List button
when you add the configured RMON event to the Event Table at the bottom of the
screen (see figure 4-21).
The Event Table area contains the following additional field:
Time
Where displays the time that the event occurred
-51-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Press the RMON Event Log button to display the log store in the flash. Only the Event type is Log or Log and Trap, then the
entries appear. The screen in Figure 4-23 appears.
Figure 4-23 RMON Event Log Screen
4.5.5 Port Utilization
The Port Utilization screen (see figure 4-24) indicates the amount of resources each interface is currently consuming. Ports in
green are functioning normally, while ports in red are currently transmitting an excessive amount of network traffic.
Figure 4-24 Port Utilization screen
-52-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page includes the following fields:
Refresh Rate
Indicates the amount of time that passes before the port utilization statistics are
refreshed. The possible field values are:
• No Refresh - indicates that the statistics are not refreshed.
• 15 Sec - indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds.
• 30 Sec - indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds.
• 60 Sec - indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds.
4.5.6 802.1x Statistics
The 802.1X Statistics screen (see figure 4-25) contains information about EAP packets received on a specific port.
Figure 4-25 802.1x Statistics screen
-53-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page includes the following fields:
Port
Indicates the port, which is polled for statistics.
Refresh Rate
Indicates the amount of time that passes before the EAP statistics are refreshed.
The possible field values are:
• No Refresh, indicates that the EAP statistics are not refreshed.
• 15 Sec, which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 15
seconds.
• 30 Sec, which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 30
seconds.
• 60 Sec, which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds
Name
Displays the measured 802.1x statistic.
Description
Describes the measured 802.1x statistic.
Packet
Displays the amount of packets measured for the particular 802.1x statistic.
4.5.7 GVRP Statistics
The GVRP Statistics screen (see figure 4-26) contains device statistics for GVRP.
The GVRP Statistics screen is divided into two areas, GVRP Statistics Table and GVRP Error Statistics Table.
Figure 4-26 GVRP Statistics screen
-54-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The following fields are relevant for both tables:
Interface
Specifies the interface type for which the statistics are displayed.
• Port, indicates port statistics are displayed.
• LAG, indicates LAG statistics are displayed.
Refresh Rate
Indicates the amount of time that passes before the GVRP statistics are refreshed.
The possible field values are:
• No Refresh, indicates that the GVRP statistics are not refreshed.
• 15 Sec, which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 15
seconds.
• 30 Sec, which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 30
seconds.
• 60 Sec, which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 60
seconds.
The GVRP Statistics Table contains the following fields:
Join Empty
Which displays the device GVRP Join Empty statistics.
Empty
Displays the device GVRP Empty statistics.
Leave Empty
By which displays the device GVRP Leave Empty statistics.
Join In
By which displays the device GVRP Join In statistics.
Leave In
By which displays the device GVRP Leave in statistics.
Leave All
By which displays the device GVRP Leave all statistics.
The GVRP Error Statistics Table contains the following fields:
Invalid Protocol ID
Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Protocol ID statistics.
Invalid Attribute Type Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute ID statistics. Invalid.
Attribute Value
Displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute Value statistics. Invalid Attribute Length,
where displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute Length statistics.
Invalid Events
Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Events statistics. The Clear All Counters
button resets all tables.
-55-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
-56-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.6 ACL
An ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet. When a packet meets the match criteria of a
rule, the specified rule action (Permit/Deny) is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match. On this menu the
interfaces to which an ACL applies must be specified, as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic. Rules for the
ACL are specified/created using the ACL Rule Configuration menu.
4.6.1 IP Based ACL
The IP Based ACL (Access Control List) screen (see figure 4-27) contains information for defining IP Based ACLs.
Figure 4-27 IP-Base ACL screen
-57-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The Page contains the following fields:
ACL Name
Displays the user-defined IP based ACLs.
New ACL Name
Defines a new user-defined IP based ACL.
Delete ACL
By which deletes the selected ACL.
Action
Indicates the action assigned to the packet matching the ACL. Packets are
forwarded or dropped. In addition, the port can be shutdown, a trap can be sent to
the network administrator, or a packet assigned rate limiting restrictions for
forwarding. The options are as follows:
• Permit, by which forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny, which drops packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Shutdown, where drops packet that meets the ACL criteria, and disables the
port to which the packet was addressed. Ports are reactivated from the Port
Management screen.
Protocol
By which creates an ACE (Access Control Event) based on a specific protocol
Select from List
Where selects from a protocols list on which ACE can be based. The possible field
values are:
• Any, matches the protocol to any protocol.
• EIGRP, which indicates that the Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
(EIGRP) is used to classify network flows.
• ICMP, which indicates that the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is
used to classify network flows.
• IGMP, which indicates that the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is
used to classify network flows.
• TCP, which indicates that the Transmission Control Protocol is used to classify
network flows.
• OSPF, by which matches the packet to the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
protocol.
• UDP, which indicates that the User Datagram Protocol is used to classify
network flows.
• Protocol ID to Match, adds user-defined protocols to which packets are
matched to the ACE. Each protocol has a specific protocol number which is
unique. The possible field range is 0-255.
TCP Flags
This filters packets by TCP flag. Filtered packets are either forwarded or dropped.
Filtering packets by TCP flags increases packet control, and network security. The
values that can be assigned are:
• Set, which enables filtering packets by selected flags.
• Unset, disables filtering packets by selected flags.
• Don’t care, which indicates that selected packets do not influence the packet
-58-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
filtering process.
The TCP Flags that can be selected are:
• Urg, indicates the packet is urgent.
• Ack, indicates the packet is acknowledged.
• Psh, indicates the packet is pushed.
• Rst, indicates the connection is dropped.
• Syn, indicates request to start a session.
• Fin, indicates request to close a session.
Source Port
Defines the TCP/UDP source port to which the ACE is matched. This field is active
only if 800/6-TCP or 800/17-UDP is selected in the Select from List drop-down
menu. The possible field range is 0 – 65535.
Destination Port
Defines the TCP/UDP destination port. This field is active only if 800/6-TCP or
800/17-UDP is selected in the Select from List drop-down menu. The possible field
range is 0 – 65535.
Source IP Address
Matches the source port IP address to which packets are addressed to the ACE.
Wildcard Mask
Defines the source IP address wildcard mask. Wildcard masks specify which bits
are used and which bits are ignored.
A wild card mask of 255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important.
A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that all the bits are important.
For example, if the source IP address 149.36.184.198 and the wildcard mask is
255.36.184.00, the first eight bits of the IP address are ignored, while the last eight
bits are used.
Destination IP
Matches the destination port IP address to which packets are addressed to the ACE
Address
Wildcard Mask
Defines the destination IP address wildcard mask.
Match DSCP
Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACE. Either the DSCP value or the IP
Precedence value is used to match packets to ACLs.
The possible field range is 0-63.
Match IP Precedence
Matches the packet IP Precedence value to the ACE. Either the DSCP value or the
IP Precedence value is used to match packets to ACLs.
The possible field range is 0-7.
Use the Add to List button when you add the configured IP Based ACLs to the IP Based ACL Table at the bottom of
the screen.
-59-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.6.2 IP Based ACL Configure Sample
This section shows how to build a IP Based ACL and apply to specify interface.
■
Sample Case: Deny IP packets to specific Class C network
¾
Purpose:
Verify a positive and negative matches to network IP address with a Class C (24 bit mask) , no matter the rule defined as
permit or deny.
1.
Any packets pass through the switch will be dropped – if the Destination IP Addresses match specific Class C.
2.
Any packets pass through the switch will be forwarded – if the Destination IP Addresses not match specific Class C.
¾
Case Design:
Action
DENY
Match
IP
Source IP Address
Any
Class C
Destination IP Address
172.16.0.0 / 255.255.255.0
Applied Interface
¾
Interface g1
Device Connection and Configuration:
-60-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Stream
Target
Protocol
Any
ID
Source Address
3
Any
Destination Address
172.16.0.0 /
255.255.255.0
Any
The procedure as following
■
1.
Create Deny ACL and add to list.
[DENY Rule]: Choose “New ACL Name”, then key in “Deny-IP Destination A”. Choose “Action”—“Deny”.
(The ACL Name can de entered with other policy name).
2.
[DENY Rule]: Keep the “Source IP Address” and “Wild Card Mask” be blanked.
3.
[DENY Rule]: Enter “172.16.0.0” in the “Destination IP Address” and “0.0.0.255” in the Wild Card Mask.
4.
After click “Add to List" button, the entry would be show at the table.
-61-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
■
Create Permit ACL and add to list
5.
[Permit Rule]: Within the same ACL “Deny-IP Destination A”, choose “Action”—“Permit”.
6.
[Permit Rule]: Keep the “Source IP Address” and “Wild Card Mask” be blanked.
7.
[Permit Rule]: Keep the “Destination IP Address” and “Wild Card Mask” be blanked.
8.
After click “Add to List" button, the entry would be show at the table.
9.
Rember to click the "Save Config" button.
■
Binding the IP ACL to specify interface
10.
Select “Security” \”ACL Binding” in the Menu bar.
11.
Choose Port “g1” at the Interface.
12.
Choose “IP Based ACL”, select ACL name with “Deny-Source A” – that we had been created at step-1. Click
“Add to List" button, the entry would be show at the table.
-62-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.6.3 MAC Based ACL
The MAC Based ACL screen (see figure 4-28) allows a MAC based ACL to be defined. ACEs can be added only if the ACL is not
bound to an interface.
Figure 4-28 MAC-Base ACL screen
-63-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The Page contains the following fields:
ACL Name
Displays the user-defined MAC based ACLs
New ACL Name
Specifies a new user-defined MAC based ACL name.
Delete ACL
By which deletes the selected ACL
Action
Indicates the ACL forwarding action. Possible field values are:
• Permit, by which forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny, drops packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Shutdown, where drops packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disables the
port to which the packet was addressed.
Source MAC Address Matches the source MAC address to which packets are addressed to the ACE.
Wildcard Mask
Defines the source IP address wildcard mask. Wildcard masks specify which bits
are used and ignored.
A wild card mask of 255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important.
A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that all the bits are important.
For example, if the source IP address 149.36.184.198 and the wildcard mask is
255.36.184.00, the first eight bits of the IP address are ignored, while the last eight
bits are used.
Dest. MAC Address
Where matches the destination MAC address to which packets are addressed to
the ACE.
Wildcard Mask, which defines the destination IP address wildcard mask.
VLAN ID
Which matches the packet’s VLAN ID to the ACE.
The possible field values are 2 to 4094.
Ether Type
Where specifies the packet’s Ethernet type.
Use the “Add to List” button to add the configured MAC Based ACLs to the MAC Based ACL Table at the bottom of
the screen.
-64-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.6.4 MAC Based ACL Configure Sample
This chapter will teah you how to configure a MAC based ACL in the Switch.
■
Sample Case: Deny IP packets to specific Class C network
¾
Purpose:
When the workstation with IP address 192.168.99.188 and MAC address 00-11-08-57-E0-1E ping to PC with IP address
192.168.99.57 and MAC address 00-30-4F-1D-9F-DE, use MAC based ACL function from ACL to deny or shutdown and
permit the traffic transmit ability of notebook that connect to port 8 of Switch.
¾
Case Design:
¾
Action
DENY
Match
MAC Address
Source MAC Address
00-11-08-57-E0-1E
Destination MAC Address
00-30-4F-1D-9F-DE
Applied Interface
Interface g2
Device Connection and Configuration:
Setting procedure from Switch Web interface:
■
Create Deny MAC ACL and add to list
1.
Please enter into Web interface and choose "ACL" function,
2.
Then choose "MAC based ACL" function.
3.
Please input a new ACL name, for example: “Deny MAC A”.
-65-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
■
4.
To defined "Permit", "Deny" or "Shutdown" from Action item.
5.
[Deny Rule]: Input Source MAC Address "00:11:08:57:E0:1E" with Wild Card Mask "00:00:00:00:00:00".
6.
[Deny Rule]: Enter Dest. Mac Address "00:30:4F:1D:9F:DE" with Wild Card Mask “00:00:00:00:00:00".
7.
[Deny Rule]:Input the VLAN ID and default VLAN ID is 1.
8.
Press "Add to List" button to complete this setting.
Create Permit MAC ACL and add to list (To allow all other packets be forwarded)
9.
[Permit Rule]: Within the same ACL “Deny-MAC A”, choose “Action”—“Permit”.
10.
[Permit Rule]: Keep the “Source MAC Address” and “Wild Card Mask” be blanked.
11.
[Permit Rule]: Keep the “Destination MAC Address” and “Wild Card Mask” be blanked.
12.
After click “Add to List" button, the entry would be show at the table.
-66-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Please press "Save Config" to save current setting.
13.
■
Binding the MAC ACL to specify interface
14.
Select “Security” \”ACL Binding” in the Menu bar.
15.
Choose Port “g2” from Interface item.
16.
Choose “MAC Based ACL”, select ACL name with “Deny-MAC A” – that we had been created at step-1. Click “Add
to List" button, the entry would be show at the table.
-67-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
17.
Please press "Save Config" to save current setting.
#Notice:
If action "shutdown" is selected, the port will be force disabled
-68-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.7 Security
This section is to control the security access of the Switch, includes the user access and management control.
The Security function contains links to the following topics:
• ACL Binding
• RADIUS
• TACACS+
• 802.1x Settings
• Port Security
• Multiple Hosts
• Storm Control
4.7.1 ACL Binding
When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the ACE (Access Control Event) rules that have been defined are applied to the
selected interface. Whenever an ACL is assigned on a port, LAG or, VLAN, flows from that ingress interface that do not match
the ACL are matched to the default rule, which is Drop unmatched packets. You can refer to figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 ACL Binding screen
-69-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The Page contains the following fields:
Interface
Indicates the interface to which the ACL is bound. The selection includes:
• Port, indicates port to apply the ACL
• LAG, indicates LAG to apply the ACL
ACL Name
Indicates the ACL which is bound to the interface. The selection includes:
• IP Based ACL
• MAC Based ACL
Use the Add to List button to add the ACL Binding configuration to the ACL Binding Table at the bottom of the screen.
4.7.2 Radius
Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers provide additional security for networks. RADIUS servers provide
a centralized authentication method for web access (see figure 4-30).
Figure 4-30 RADIUS screen
-70-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The Page contains the following fields:
IP Address
The Authentication Server IP address.
Priority
Displays the server priority. The possible values are 0-65535, where 1 is the
highest value. The RADIUS Server priority is used to configure the server query
order.
Authentication Port
Identifies the authentication port. The authentication port is used to verify the
RADIUS server authentication. The authenticated port default is 1812.
Number of Retries
Defines the number of transmitted requests sent to RADIUS server before a failure
occurs. The possible field values are 1 - 10. 3 is the default value.
Timeout for Reply
This defines the amount of the time in seconds the device waits for an answer from
the RADIUS server before retrying the query, or switching to the next server.
The possible field values are 1 - 30. 3 is the default value.
Dead Time
This defines the amount of time (minutes) that a RADIUS server is bypassed for
service requests. The range is 0-2000. The Dead Time default is 0 minutes.
Key String
This defines the default key string used for authenticating and encrypting all
RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server.
This key must match the RADIUS encryption.
Source IP Address
Defines the source IP address that is used for communication with RADIUS
servers.
Usage Type
Specifies the RADIUS server authentication type. The default value is Login. The
possible field values are:
• Login, indicates that the RADIUS server is used for authenticating user name
and passwords.
• 802.1X, indicates that the RADIUS server is used for 802.1X authentication.
• All, where indicates that the RADIUS server is used for authenticating user
name and passwords, and 802.1X port authentication.
Use the Add to List button when you add the RADIUS configuration to the RADIUS Table at the bottom of the screen.
-71-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.7.3 TACACS+
The device provides Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) client support. TACACS+ provides
centralized security for validation of users accessing the device. TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system,
while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes. The TACACS+ protocol ensures network
integrity through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS+ server. You can refer to figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31 TACACS+ screen
The Page contains the following fields:
Host IP Address
Indicates the TACACS+ Server IP address.
Displays the order in which the TACACS+ servers are used. The default is 0.
By which displays the device source IP address used for the TACACS+ session
between the device and the TACACS+ server.
Key String
This defines the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+ server. The key
must match the encryption key used on the TACACS+ server.
Authentication Port
Displays the port number through which the TACACS+ session occurs.
The Timeout for Reply This displays the amount of time that passes before the connection between the
device and the TACACS+ server times out. The field range is 1-30 seconds.
Status
Displays the connection status between the device and the TACACS+ server. The
possible field values are:
• Connected, there is currently a connection between the device and the
TACACS+ server.
• Not Connected, there is not currently a connection between the device and
the TACACS+ server.
Single Connection
Maintains a single open connection between the device and the TACACS+ server
when selected the Add to List button to add the TACACS+ configuration to the
TACACS+ table at the bottom of the screen.
Priority
Source IP Address
-72-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.7.4 802.1x settings
Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Authentication
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized
clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client
connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.
Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic
through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.
This section includes this conceptual information:
• Device Roles
• Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange
• Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States
„
Device Roles
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.
z Client—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the
switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft
Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.)
z Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the identity
of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services.
Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.
RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the
RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.
z Switch (802.1X device)—controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client. The
switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information
-73-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client. The switch
includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL frames and
relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is
re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the
authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the
authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for
Ethernet and sent to the client.
„
Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange
The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto
interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions
from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an
initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the
client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.
However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate
authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity.
If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the
#Notice:
client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts
to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in
the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated.
When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and
the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes
authorized.
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. Following figure shows a message
exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.
-74-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States
The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized
state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is
successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally.
If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In
this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted
access to the network.
In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the
authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a
fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized
state.
If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to
authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains
in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can
retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails,
and network access is not granted.
When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state.
If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized
state.
-75-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
■
802.1X Settings of WGSW-Switch
Port based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port basis via an external server. Only authenticated
and approved system users can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the RADIUS server using the
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Refer to figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 802.1x setting screen
The Page contains the following fields:
Enable 802.1x
Place a checkmark in the check box to enable 802.1x, authentication.
Port
Indicates the port name.
Status Port Control
This specifies the port authorization state. The possible field values are as follows:
• Force-Authorized, the controlled port state is set to Force-Authorized (forward
traffic).
• Force-Unauthorized, the controlled port state is set to Force-Unauthorized
(discard traffic).
Enable Periodic
Re-authentication
Permits immediate port re-authentication. The Setting Timer button opens the
Setting Timer screen to configure ports for 802.1x functionality.
-76-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
Setting Timer
On this screen, it includes port, re-authentication, resending EAP …. (Refer to figure 4-33)
Figure 4-33 Setting Timer parameter screen
The Page contains the following fields:
Quiet Period
Specifies the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state
following a failed authentication exchange.
(Range: 0-65535).
Resending EAP
Specifies the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP request/ identity frame, from the supplicant (client), before resending the
requests.
Max EAP Requests
Which the total amount of EAP requests sent. If a response is not received after
the defined period, the authentication process is restarted.
The field default is 2 retries.
Supplicant Timeout
Which displays the number of seconds that lapses before EAP requests are
resent to the supplicant (Range: 1-65535).
The field default is 30 seconds.
Server Timeout
Which specifies the number of seconds that lapses before the switch resends a
request to the authentication server (Range: 1-65535).
The field default is 30 seconds.
-77-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.7.5 Port Security
Work security screen (see figure 4-34) can be increased by limiting access on a specific port only to users with specific MAC
addresses. MAC addresses can be dynamically learned or statically configured. Locked port security monitors both received
and learned packets that are received on specific ports. Access to the locked port is limited to users with specific MAC
addresses. These addresses are either manually defined on the port, or learned on that port up to the point when it is locked.
When a packet is received on a locked port, and the packet source MAC address is not tied to that port (either it was learned on
a different port, or it is unknown to the system), the protection mechanism is invoked, and can provide various options.
Unauthorized packets arriving at a locked port are either: Forwarded, Discarded with no trap, Discarded with a trap, Cause the
port to be shut down.
Figure 4-34 Port Security screen
Locked port security also enables storing a list of MAC addresses in the configuration file. The MAC address list can be
restored after the device has been reset.
Disabled ports are activated from the Port Security page.
Interface
Where displays the port or LAG name
Lock Interface
Which selecting this option locks the specified interface.
Learning Mode
Where defines the locked port type. The Learning Mode field is enabled only if
Locked is selected in the Interface Status field. The possible field values are:
• Classic Lock, by which locks the port using the classic lock mechanism. The
port is immediately locked,
regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned.
• Limited Dynamic Lock, which locks the port by deleting the current dynamic
-78-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns up to the maximum
addresses allowed on the port. Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are
enabled.
Max Entries
Specifies the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The Max
Entries field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Interface Status field. In
addition, the Limited Dynamic Lock mode is selected.
The default is 1.
Action on Violation
Where indicates the action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port. The
possible field values are:
• Discard, which discards packets from any unlearned source. This is the
default value.
• Forward Normal, forwards packets from an unknown source without learning
the MAC address.
• Discard Disable, which discards packets from any unlearned source and
shuts down the port. The port remains shut down until reactivated, or until the
device is reset.
Enable Trap
This enables traps when a packet is received on a locked port.
Trap Frequency
Which the amount of time (in seconds) between traps.
The default value is 10 seconds
#Notice
In order to change the Learning Mode, the Lock Interface must be set to unlocked. Once the mode is
changed, the Lock Interface can be reinstated.
-79-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.7.6 Multiple Hosts
The Multiple Hosts screen (see figure 4-35) allows network managers to configure advanced port-based authentication settings
for specific ports and VLANs.
Figure 4-35 Multiple Hosts screen
The Page contains the following fields:
Port
Displays the port number for which advanced port-based
authentication is enabled.
Enable Multiple Hosts When checked, indicates that multiple hosts are enabled. Multiple
hosts must be enabled in order to either disable the ingress-filter, or to
use port-lock security on the selected port.
Action on Violation
This defines the action to be applied to packets arriving in single-host
mode, from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC
address. The possible field values are:
• Discard, which discards the packets. This is the default value.
• Forward, by which forwards the packet.
• DiscardDisable, discards the packets and shuts down the port.
The ports remains shut down until reactivated, or until the device
is reset.
Enable Traps
When checked, indicates that traps are enabled for Multiple Hosts.
-80-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Trap Frequency
Defines the time period by which traps are sent to the host. The Trap
Frequency (1-1000000) field can be defined only if multiple hosts are
disabled.
The default is 10 seconds.
Status
Where indicates the host status.
4.7.7 Storm control
A BroadcastStorm is a result of an excessive amount of broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a
single port. Forwarded message responses are heaped onto the network, straining network resources or causing the network to
time out.
The system measures the incoming Broadcast and Multicast frame rate separately on each port, and discard frames when the
rate exceeds a user-defined rate.
The Storm Control page provides fields for enabling and configuring Storm Control. The screen in Figure 4-36 appears.
Figure 4-36 Storm Control screen
The Page contains the following fields:
Port
Displays the port number for which storm control is enabled
Broadcast Control
This indicates whether broadcast packet types are forwarded on the specific
interface.
Mode
By which specifies the Broadcast mode currently enabled on the device. The
possible field values are:
• Unknown Unicast, Multicast & Broadcast, counts Unicast, Multicast, and
Broadcast traffic.
-81-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
• Multicast & Broadcast, counts Broadcast and Multicast traffic together.
• Broadcast Only, counts only Broadcast traffic.
Rate Threshold
Where the maximum rate (packets per second) at which unknown packets are
forwarded. The range is 70 -100000.
The default value is 3500.
4.8 QoS
Network traffic is usually unpredictable, and the only basic assurance that can be offered is best effort traffic delivery. To
overcome this challenge, Quality of Service (QoS) is applied throughout the network. This ensures that network traffic is
prioritized according to specified criteria, and that specific traffic receives preferential treatment. And Cos Settings, Queue
settings, Dscp Settings, Bandwidth, Basic Mode, Advanced mode are provided.
4.8.1 CoS Settings
The terms Class of Service (CoS) and QoS are used in the following:
CoS provides varying Layer 2 traffic services. CoS refers to classification of traffic to traffic-classes, which are handled as an
aggregate whole, with no per-flow settings. CoS is usually related to the 802.1p service that classifies flows according to their
Layer 2 priority, as set in the VLAN header. QoS refers to Layer 2 traffic and above. QoS handles per-flow settings, even within a
single traffic class.
The CoS Settings screen (see figure 4-37) contains fields for enabling or disabling CoS. In addition, the Trust mode can be
selected. The Trust mode relies on predefined fields within the packet to determine the egress queue settings. (To configure the
Trust Mode, see 4.8.5.)
The CoS Settings screen has two areas, CoS Settings and CoS to Queue.
-82-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Figure 4-37 CoS Settings screen
The Page contains the following fields:
CoS Mode
This indicates if QoS is enabled on the interface. The possible values are:
• Disable, disables QoS on the interface.
• Basic, enables QoS on the interface.
• Advanced, enables the Advanced Mode QoS on the interface.
Class of Service
Specifies the CoS priority tag values, where zero is the lowest and 7 is the highest
Queue
Defines the traffic forwarding queue to which the CoS priority is mapped.
Four traffic priority queues are supported.
The Restore Defaults button restores the device factory defaults for mapping CoS values to a forwarding queue.
-83-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
CoS Default:
The Table contains the following fields:
Interface
Interface to which the CoS configuration applies.
Default CoS
Determines the default CoS value for incoming packets for which a VLAN tag is not
defined. The possible field values are 0-7.
The default CoS is 0.
Restore Defaults
Restores the device factory defaults for mapping CoS values to forwarding queue.
LAG
LAG to which the CoS configuration applies.
4.8.2 Queue Setting
The Queue Setting screen (see figure 4-38) contains fields for defining the QoS queue forwarding types.
Figure 4-38 Queue Setting screen
The page contains the following fields:
Strict Priority
This indicates that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based strictly on the
queue priority.
WRR
Queue
This indicates that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based strictly on the
WRR.
Shows the queue for which the queue settings are displayed.
The possible field range is 1 - 4.
WRR Weight
This displays the WRR weights to queues.
Default Rate 1:2:4:8
-84-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
% of WRR Bandwidth Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned to the queue.
These values are fixed and are not user- defined.
• 6.67%
• 13.33%
• 26.67%
• 53.33%
4.8.3 DSCP Settings
The DSCP Settings screen (see figure 4-39) enables mapping DSCP values to specific queues.
Figure 4-39 DSCP Settings screen
The DSCP Settings screen contains the following fields:
DSCP
Queue
Indicates the Differentiated Services Code Point value in the incoming packet.
Maps the DSCP value to the selected queue.
.,.
-85-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.8.4 Bandwidth
The Bandwidth screen (refer to figure 4-40) allows network managers to define the bandwidth settings for a specified egress
interface. Modifying queue scheduling affects the queue settings globally. The Bandwidth screen is not used with the Service
mode, as bandwidth settings are based on services.
Figure 4-40 Bandwidth screen
Queue shaping can be based per queue and/or per interface. Shaping is determined by the lower specified value. The queue
shaping type is selected in the Bandwidth screen, include interface, port, LAG, Rate Limit, Ingress Rate Limit Status, Rate
Limit….
The page contains the following fields:
Interface
Indicates the interface for which the queue shaping information is displayed. The possible
field values are:
• Port, indicates the port for which the bandwidth settings are displayed.
• LAG, indicates the LAG for which the bandwidth settings are displayed.
Ingress Rate Limit Status
which indicates if rate limiting is defined on the interface.
Rate Limit (62-1000000
Defines the amount of bandwidth assigned to the interface.
Kbps)
The possible field values are 62-1000000 Kbps.
Egress Shaping Rate on
Indicates if rate limiting is enabled on the interface.
Selected Port
-86-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Committed Information
Defines CIR as the queue shaping type.
Rate (CIR)
The possible field value is 64 - 1,000,000 Kbps.
4.8.5 Basic Mode
The Basic Mode screen (see figure 4-41) contains the following fields:
Figure 4-41 Basic Mode screen
The page contains the following fields:
Trust Mode
Displays the trust mode. If a packet’s CoS tag and DSCP tag are mapped to
different queues, the Trust Mode determines the queue to which the packet is
assigned. Possible values are:
• CoS, which sets trust mode to CoS on the device and the CoS mapping
determined the packet queue.
• DSCP, sets trust mode to the DSCP on the device. The DSCP mapping
determines the packet queue.
-87-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.8.6 Advanced Mode
Advanced QoS mode (see figure 4-42) provides rules for specifying flow classification and assigning rule actions that relate to
bandwidth management. The rules are based on the Access Control Lists (see Access Control Tab).
Figure 4-42 Advance Mode screen
MAC ACLs and IP ACLs can be grouped together in more complex structures, called policies. Policies can be applied to an
interface. Policy ACLs are applied in the sequence they appear within the policy. Only a single policy can be attached to a port.
In advanced QoS mode, ACLs can be applied directly to an interface in the Security -ACL Binding. However, a policy and ACL
cannot be simultaneously applied to an interface.
After assigning packets to a specific queue, services such as configuring output queues for the scheduling scheme, or
configuring output shaping for burst size, CIR, or CBS per interface or per queue, can be applied.
Out of Profile DSCP Assignments, this button opens up the DSCP Map screen. (See figure 4-43):
-88-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Figure 4-43 Out of Profile DSCP Assignments screen
The page contains the following fields:
DSCP In
DSCP Out
This displays the DSCP In value. The value is form 0-63.
This displays the current DSCP out value. A new value can be selected from the
pull-down menu.
The Policy Settings button opens the Policy Name screen (see figure 4-44):
Figure 4-44 Policy Settings screen
-89-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Policy Name
Defines a new Policy name.
Add to List
This button will add the policy to the Policy Name table.
Select Policy
This selects an existing Policy by name.
New Policy Name
Which defines a new Policy name.
Class Map
Where selects an existing Class Map by name.
-90-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
Class Map setting
New Class Map, by which the New Class Map button opens the New Class Map screen (see figure 4-45)
Figure 4-45 Class Map Settings screen
The page contains the following fields:
Class Map Name
defines a new Class Map name.
Preferred ACL
which indicates if packets are first matched to an IP based ACL or a MAC based
ACL, the possible field values are:
• IP Based ACLs, matches packets to IP based ACLs first, then matches
packets to MAC based ACLs.
• MAC Based ACLs, matches packets to MAC based ACLs first, then matches
packets to IP based ACLs.
IP ACL
Matches packets to IP based ACLs first, and then matches packets to MAC based
ACLs.
Match
Criteria used to match IP addresses and /or MAC addresses with an ACL’s
address. The possible field values are:
• And, both the MAC-based and the IP-based ACL must match a packet.
• Or, either the MAC-based or the IP-based ACL must match a packet.
MAC ACL
Matches packets to MAC based ACLs and to IP based ACLs.
-91-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Aggregate Policer, where user-defined aggregate policers. The Aggregate Policer button opens the New Aggregate Policer
screen.
„
Aggregate Policer Setting
New Aggregate Policer screen (see figure 4-46):
Figure 4-46 Aggregate Policer Settings screen
The page contains the following fields:
Aggregate Policer Name
Where enter a name in this field.
Ingress Committed
This defines the CIR in bits per second. This field is only relevant when the Police
value is Single.
Information Rate (CIR)
Ingress Committed Burst
Size (CBS)
Exceed Action
This defines the CBS in bytes per second. This field is only relevant when the
Police value is Single.
Action assigned to incoming packets exceeding the CIR.
This field is only relevant when the Police value is Single. Possible values are:
• Drop, which drops packets exceeding the defined CIR value.
• Remark DSCP, where remarks packet’s DSCP values exceeding the defined
CIR value.
• None, forwarding packets exceeding the defined CIR value.
-92-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.9. Spanning Tree
■
Theory of Spanning Tree Protocol
The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links
between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is
established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be
used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are
established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link
failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.
This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning
Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible
to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the
following before making any changes from the default values.
The Switch STP performs the following functions:
。
Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements.
。
Creates multiple spanning trees – from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified groups.
。
Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in the tree.
。
Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.
Bridge Protocol Data Units
For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:
。
The unique switch identifier.
。
The path cost to the root associated with each switch port.
。
The por tidentifier.
STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the
following information:
。
The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch.
。
The path cost to the root from the transmitting port.
。
The port identifier of the transmitting port.
The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on
which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch
uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission.
The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:
。
One switch is elected as the root switch.
。
The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch.
。
A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the
root.
。
A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.
。
Ports included in the STP are selected.
-93-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Creating a Stable STP Topology
It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC
address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch,
STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.
When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network
might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can
cause a root-port change.
STP Port States
The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that
transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new
network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for
the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to
allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must
transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.
Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:
。
Blocking – the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets.
。
Listening – the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state.
。
Learning – the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets.
。
Forwarding – the port is forwarding packets.
。
Disabled – the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first.
A port transitions from one state to another as follows:
。
From initialization (switch boot) to blocking.
。
From blocking to listening or to disabled.
。
From listening to learning or to disabled.
。
From learning to forwarding or to disabled.
。
From forwarding to disabled.
。
From disabled to blocking.
-94-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Switch
Blocking
Listening
Disable
Learning
Forwarding
STP Port State Transitions
You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the
network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly
configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received
by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.
2. STP Parameters
STP Operation Levels
The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree
consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more
ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.
On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root
#Notice
Bridge and the Designated Bridges. On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated
Ports.
-95-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:
Parameter
Description
Default Value
Bridge Identifier(Not user
A combination of the User-set priority and
32768 + MAC
configurable
the switch’s MAC address.
except by setting priority
The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts:
below)
a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC
address 32768 + MAC.
A relative priority for each switch – lower
Priority
32768
numbers give a higher priority and a greater
chance of a given switch being elected as
the root bridge.
The length of time between broadcasts of
Hello Time
2 seconds
the hello message by the switch.
Maximum Age Timer
Measures the age of a received BPDU for a
20 seconds
port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded
when its age exceeds the value of the
maximum age timer.
Forward Delay Timer
The amount time spent by a port in the
15 seconds
learning and listening states waiting for a
BPDU that may return the port to the
blocking state.
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:
Variable
Description
Default Value
Port Priority
A relative priority for each
32768
port –lower numbers give a higher priority
and a greater chance of a given port being
elected as the root port.
Port Cost
A value used by STP to evaluate paths –
19-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports
STP calculates path costs and selects the
4-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports
path with the minimum cost as the active
path.
-96-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Spanning-Tree Configuration
Feature
Default Value
Enable state
STP enabled for all ports
Port priority
128
Port cost
19
Bridge Priority
32,768
User-Changeable STA Parameters
The Switch’s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings
as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows:
Priority – A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.
Hello Time – The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent
by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not
the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.
#Notice
The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age. Otherwise, a configuration error will occur.
Max. Age – The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from
the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it
turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.
Forward Delay Timer – The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the
Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.
#Notice
Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters:
Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)
Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)
Port Priority – A Port Priority can be from 0 to 255. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as
the Root Port.
Port Cost – A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 65535. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to
forward packets.
3. Illustration of STP
A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in Figure 5-7. In this example, you can anticipate some
major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied. If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast
it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A ... and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in
a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example, STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B
and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port
settings. Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end
there. Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default
factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a
particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the
-97-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Port Priority and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.
LAN 1
Portcast = 19
A
Port 3
Bridge ID = 15
Port 1
Port 2
Portcast = 4
Portcast = 4
Portcast = 4
B
Portcast = 4
C
Port 1
Port 1
Bridge ID = 30
Port 2
Bridge ID = 20
Port 3
Port 2
Portcast = 19
Portcast = 19
Port 3
Portcast = 19
LAN 2
LAN 3
Before Applying the STA Rules
In this example, only the default STP values are used.
LAN 1
A
Port 3
Root Bridge
Port 1
Port 2
Designated Port
Designated Port
Root Port
B
Root Port
C
Port 1
Port 1
Designated Bridge
Port 2
Port 3
Blocked
LAN 2
Port 2
Port 3
LAN 3
After Applying the STA Rules
The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost
between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 4) on switch A are connected to one (optional)
Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast
Ethernet link (default port cost = 19). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the default to
-98-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.
■
Supported Spanning Tree Protocol of WGSD Series Switch
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides tree topography for any arrangement of bridges. STP also provides one path between
end stations on a network, eliminating loops.
Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts. Loops in an extended network can cause bridges to forward traffic
indefinitely, resulting in increased traffic and reducing network efficiency.
The device supports the following Spanning Tree versions:
• Classic STP, by which provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.
• Rapid STP, which detects and uses network topologies that provide faster convergence of the spanning tree, without
creating forwarding loops.
• Multiple STP, which provides full connectivity for packets allocated to any VLAN. Multiple STP is based on the RSTP. In
addition, Multiple STP transmits packets assigned to different VLANs through different MST regions. MST regions act as a
single bridge.
4.9.1 STP Status
The STP Status screen (see figure 4-47) describes the STP status on the device.
Figure 4-47 STP Status screen
The page contains the following fields:
Spanning Tree State
By which indicates if STP is enabled on the device.
Spanning Tree Mode
By which indicates the STP mode by which STP is enabled on the device.
Bridge ID
Where identifies the Bridge priority and MAC address.
Designated Root
This indicates the ID of the bridge with the lowest path cost to the instance ID.
Root Port
Where indicates the port number that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to
the Root Bridge. It is significant when the Bridge is not the Root. The default is 0.
Root Path Cost
Where the cost of the path from this bridge to the root.
-99-
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Root Maximum Age
(sec)
This indicates the device Maximum Age Time. The Maximum Age Time indicates
the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before sending configuration
messages. The default max age is 20 seconds. The range is 6 to 40 seconds.
Root Hello Time (sec) This indicates the device Hello Time. The Hello Time indicates the amount of time
in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages. The default is 2
seconds. The range is 1 to 10 seconds.
Root Forward delay
(sec)
Topology Changes
This indicates the device forward delay time. The Forward Delay Time indicates the
amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before
forwarding packets. The default is 15 seconds. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.
This indicates the total amount of STP state changes that have occurred.
Counts
Last Topology Change Which indicates the amount of time that has elapsed since the bridge was initialized
or reset, and the last topographic change occurred. The time is displayed in a day
hour minute second format, for example, 2 days 5 hours 10 minutes and 4 seconds.
4.9.2 The Global STP
The Global STP screen (see figure 4-48) contains parameters for enabling STP on the device.Global Setting Spanning Tree
State, which indicates if STP is enabled on the device.
Figure 4-48 Global STP screen
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
„
Global Setting
STP Operation Mode
This indicates the STP mode by which STP is enabled on the device. The possible
field values are:
• Classic STP, where enables Classic STP on the device. This is the default
value.
• Rapid STP, where enables Rapid STP on the device.
• Multiple STP, where enables Multiple STP on the device.
BPDU Handling
This determines how BPDU packets are managed when STP is disabled on the
port/ device. BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information. The possible
field values are:
• Filtering, where filters BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an
interface. This is the default value.
• Flooding, where floods BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an
interface.
Path Cost Default
Values
This specifies the method used to assign default path costs to STP ports. The
possible field values are:
• Short, specifies 1 through 65,535 range for port path costs.
This is the default value.
• Long, specifies 1 through 200,000,000 range for port path costs. The default
path costs assigned to an interface varies according to the selected method.
„
Bridge Settings
•
Priority
Specifies the bridge priority value. When switches or bridges are running STP, each
is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the device with the lowest priority
value becomes the Root Bridge.
The port priority value is provided in increments of 4096. For example, 4096, 8192,
12288, etc. The range is 0 to 65535.
The default value is 32768.
•
Hello Time
This specifies the device Hello Time. The Hello Time indicates the amount of time in
seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages.
The default is 2 seconds. The range is 1 to 10 seconds.
•
Max Age
Where specifies the device Maximum Age Time. The Maximum Age Time indicates
the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before sending configuration
messages.
The default max age is 20 seconds. The range is 6 to 40 seconds.
•
Forward Delay
This specifies the device forward delay time. The Forward Delay Time indicates the
amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before
forwarding packets.
The default is 15 seconds. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.9.3 STP Port Settings
Network administrators can assign STP settings to specific interfaces using the STP Interface Settings screen (see figure 4-49).
The STP Interface Settings page contains the following fields:
Figure 4-49 STP Port Settings screen
The page contains the following fields:
Interface
Indicates the port or LAG on which STP is enabled.
STP
which indicates if STP is enabled on the port.
Port Fast
Indicates if Fast Link is enabled on the port. If Fast Link mode is enabled for a port,
the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding state when the port link is
up. Fast Link optimizes the STP protocol convergence. STP convergence can take
30-60 seconds in large networks.
Port State
Displays the current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines what
forwarding action is taken on traffic. Possible port states are:
• Disabled, indicates that STP is currently disabled on the port. The port
forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.
• Blocking, where indicates that the port is currently blocked and cannot
forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. Blocking is displayed when Classic
STP is enabled.
• Listening, where indicates that the port is in Listening mode. The port cannot
forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses.
• Learning, where indicates that the port is in whose mode. The port cannot
forward traffic, however it can learn new MAC addresses.
• Forwarding, the port that can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses.
Speed
Indicates the speed at which the port is operating.
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Path Cost
Indicates the port contribution to the root path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a
higher or lower value, and is used to forward traffic when a path being rerouted.
Value Rage : 1-20000000.
Default Path Cost - The default path cost of the port is automatically set by the
port speed and the default path cost method. The default values for path costs are:
- Ethernet - 2000000
- Fast Ethernet - 200000
- Gigabit Ethernet - 20000
Default Path Cost
When selected the default path cost is implemented.
Priority
Indicates priority value of the port. The priority value influences the port choice
when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop. The priority value is between 0
-240. The priority value is provided in increments of 16.
Designated Bridge ID Indicates the bridge priority and the MAC Address of the designated bridge.
Designated Port ID
Indicates the selected port’s priority and interface.
Designated Cost
Where indicates the cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a
lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.
Forward Transitions
This indicates the number of times the port has changed from the Blocking state to
Forwarding state.
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
„
STP Port status table
Figure 4-50 STP Port status screen
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.9.4 RSTP Port settings
While the classic spanning tree prevents Layer 2 forwarding loops in a general network topology, convergence can take
between 30-60 seconds. This time may delay detecting possible loops, and propagating status topology changes. Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) detects and uses network topologies that allow a faster STP convergence without creating
forwarding loops (refer to figure 4-51).
Figure 4-51 RSTP Port Settings screen
The page contains the following fields:
Interface
Where displays the port or LAG on which Rapid STP is enabled.
Role
Where indicates the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to
STP paths. The possible field values are:
• Root, where provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch.
• Designated, where indicates that the port or LAG via which the designated
switch is attached to the LAN.
• Alternate, which provides an alternate path to the root switch from the root
interface.
• Backup, which provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the
Spanning Tree leaves. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected
in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two
or more connections connected to a shared segment.
• Disabled, which indicates the port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.
Mode
Where indicates the current Spanning Tree mode. The Spanning Tree mode is
selected in the Global STP screen. The possible field values are:
• Classic STP, which indicates that Classic STP is enabled on the device.
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
• Rapid STP, which indicates that Rapid STP is enabled on the device.
• Multiple STP, which indicates that Multiple STP is enabled on the device.
Fast Link
This indicates if Fast Link is enabled or disabled for the port or LAG. If Fast Link is
enabled for a port, the port is automatically placed in the forwarding state.
Port State
Indicates if RSTP is enabled on the interface.
Point-to-Point Admin
Indicates if a point-to-point links are established, or permits the device to establish a
point-to-point link. The possible field values are:
Status
• Auto. Point-to-point links are automatically established by the device.
• Enabled, enables the device to establish a point-to-point link.
• Disabled, where disables point-to-point link.
Point-to-Point Oper
Status
Indicates the Point-to-Point operating state. To run a migration test, press Activate
next to the Activate Protocol Migration Test field. The test sends Link Control
Protocol (LCP) packets to test if a data link is enabled.
To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the originating PPP first sends Link Control
#Notice
Protocol (LCP) packets to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and optional
facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols
(NCP) packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols. When each of the
chosen network layer protocols has been configured, packets from each network layer protocol can
be sent over the link. The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP
packets close the link, or until some external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It
may differ from the administrative state.
4.9.5 MSTP Properties
MSTP provides differing load balancing scenarios. For example, while port A is blocked in one STP instance, the same port is
placed in the Forwarding State in another STP instance. The MSTP Properties screen (see figure 4-52) contains information for
defining global MSTP settings, region names, MSTP revisions, and maximum hops.
Figure 4-52 MSTP Properties
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Region Name
Where provides a user-defined STP region name.
Revision
Where defines unsigned 16-bit number that identifies the revision of the current
MST configuration. The revision number is required as part of the MST
configuration.
The possible field range 0-65535.
Max Hops
Which indicates the total number of hops that occur in a specific region before the
BPDU is discarded. Once the BPDU is discarded, the port information is aged out.
The possible field range is 1-40.
The field default is 20 hops.
IST Master
Where identifies the Spanning Tree Master instance. The IST Master is the
specified instance root.
4.9.6 MSTP Instance Settings
MSTP opreation maps VLANs into STP instances (see figure 4-53) Packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along
different paths within Multiple Spanning Trees Regions (MST Regions), Regions are one or more Multiple Spanning Tree
bridges by which frames can be transmitted. In configuring MST, the MST region to which the device belongs is defined. A
configuration consists of the name, revision, and region to which the device belongs.
Network Administrators can define MSTP Instances settings using the MSTP Instance Settings screen.
Figure 4-53 MSTP Instance Settings screen
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
„
Instance Configuration
Press the VLAN Instance Configuration button, a new window popup. Assgin selected VLAN to specify MST Instance at the
VLAN Instatnce Configuration page. The screen in Figure 4-54 appears.
Figure 4-54 MSTP VLAN Instance Configuration screen
Defines the VLAN group to which the interface is assigned.
Instance ID
„
Included VLANs
Included VLAN
„
Where maps the selected VLAN to the selected instance. Each VLAN belongs to one instance.
Instance Settings
Bridge Priority
Specifies the selected spanning tree instance device priority. The field range is
0-61440.
Designated Root Bridge ID
which indicates the ID of the bridge with the lowest path cost to the instance ID.
Root Port
Where indicates the selected instance’s root port.
Root Path Cost
Indicates the selected instance’s path cost.
Bridge ID
Indicates the bridge ID of the selected instance.
Remaining Hops
Indicates the number of hops remaining to the next destination.
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.9.7 MSTP Interface Settings
Network Administrators can assign MSTP Interface settings using the MSTP Interface Settings screen (see figure 4-55).
Figure 4-55 MSTP Interfance Settings screen
The MSTP Interface Settings screen contains the following fields:
Instance ID
Lists the MSTP instances configured on the device. Possible field range is 0-15.
Interface
Indicates the interface for which the MSTP settings are displayed. The possible field
values are two types:
• Port - Specifies the port for which the MSTP settings are displayed.
• LAG - Specifies the LAG for which the MSTP settings are displayed.
where indicates whether the port is enabled for the specific instance.
indicates if the port is a point-to-point port, or a port connected to a hub. The possible
field values are:
• Boundary Port, attaches MST bridges to LAN in an outlying region. If the port is
a boundary port, it also indicates whether the device on the other side of the link
is working in RSTP or STP mode.
• Master Port, where provides connectivity from a MSTP region to the outlying
CIST root.
• Internal, indicates the port is an internal port.
Indicates the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP
paths. The possible field values are:
• Root, provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root device.
• Designated, indicates the port or LAG via which the designated device is
attached to the LAN.
• Alternate, provides an alternate path to the root device from the root interface.
• Backup, provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the
Spanning Tree leaves. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in
a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or
more connections connected to a shared segment.
• Disabled, which indicates the port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.
Defines the interface priority for specified instance.
The default value is 128.
Port State
Type
Role
Interface Priority
-10
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Indicates the port contribution to the Spanning Tree instance. The range should
always be 1200,000,000.
Designated Bridge ID Where indicates that the bridge ID number that connects the link or shared LAN to the
root.
Designated Port ID
By which indicates that the Port ID number on the designated bridge that connects the
link or the shared LAN to the root.
Designated Cost
Indicates that the default path cost is assigned according to the method selected on
the Spanning Tree Global Settings screen.
Forward Transitions This indicates the number of times the port has changed from the Forwarding state to
Blocking state.
Remaining Hops
Indicates the hops remaining to the next destination.
Path Cost
„
MSTP Interface status table
The page displays the current MST Interfaces configuration and status.
Figure 4-56 MSTP Interfance configuration screen
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.10 Multicast
On this field, included IGMP Snooping, Bridge Multicast, Forward All.
About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping
Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will
become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this
information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case
where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the ‘queried’. This router then keeps
track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to
determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if
there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets
will not be forwarded to that sub network.
IGMP Versions 1 and 2
Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to
communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group.
IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data.
The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:
IGMP Message Format
Octets
0
8
Type
16
31
Checksum
Response Time
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)
The IGMP Type codes are shown below:
Type
Meaning
0x11
Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)
0x11
Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is Present)
0x16
Membership Report (version 2)
0x17
Leave a Group (version 2)
0x12
Membership Report (version 1)
IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks.
The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.
A host sends an IGMP “report” to join a group
A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).
A host will send a “leave” report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).
Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members
exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
on the network.
The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.
IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave
message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.
The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:
Non-Member
Leave Group
(Stop Timer)
Delaying Member
Leave Group
Join Group
(Send Report,
Start Timer)
Query Received
(Start Timer)
Report Received
(Stop Timer)
Idle Member
Timer Expried
(Send report)
IGMP State Transitions
IGMP Snooping Configuration
The default status of the IGMP Snooping function is disabled. To turn on the IGMP Snooping, select “Enable” of the IGMP
Snooping Status field and click on the “OK” button to save.
4.3.3.1 IGMP Configuration
The switch support IP multicast, you can enable IGMP protocol on web management's switch setting advanced page, then
display the IGMP snooping information in this page, you can view difference multicast group VID and member port in here, IP
multicast addresses range from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is an internal protocol of the Internet Protocol (IP) suite. IP manages multicast
traffic by using switches, routers, and hosts that support IGMP. Enabling IGMP allows the ports to detect IGMP queries and
report packets and manage IP multicast traffic through the switch. IGMP have three fundamental types of message as follows:
Message
Description
A message sent from the querier (IGMP router or switch) asking for a response
Query
from each host belonging to the multicast group.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host wants to be or is a
Report
Leave Group
member of a given group indicated in the report message.
A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host has quit to be a
member of a specific multicast group.
4.10.1 IGMP Snooping
When IGMP Snooping (see figure 4-57) is enabled globally, all IGMP packets are forwarded to the CPU. The CPU analyzes the
incoming packets and determines which ports want to join which Multicast groups, which ports have Multicast routers generating
IGMP queries, which routing protocols are forwarding packets and Multicast traffic. Ports requesting to join a specific Multicast
group issue an IGMP report, specifying that Multicast group is accepting members. This results in the creation of the Multicast
filtering database.
Figure 4-57 IGMP Snooping screen
The page contains the following fields:
„
IGMP Global
IGMP Snooping Status Indicates if IGMP Snooping is enabled or Disabled on the device.
„
VLAN IGMP Settings
VLAN ID
Specifies the VLAN ID.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
IGMP Status
Indicates if IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN.
Auto Learn
Indicates if Auto Learn is enabled on the device. If Auto Learn is enabled, the
device automatically learns where other Multicast groups are located.
Enables or disables Auto Learn on the Ethernet device.
Host Timeout
Indicates the amount of time host waits to receive a message before timing out.
The default time is 260 seconds.
MRouter Timeout
Indicates the amount of the time the Multicast router waits to receive a message
before it times out.
The default value is 300 seconds.
Leave Timeout
Indicates the time the host waits, after requesting to leave the IGMP group and not
receiving a Join message from another station, before timing out. If a Leave
Timeout occurs, the switch notifies the Multicast device to stop sending traffic. The
Leave Timeout value is either user-defined, or an immediate leave value.
The default timeout is 10 seconds.
#Notice:
IGMP Snooping can be enabled only if Bridge Multicast Filtering is enabled.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.10.2 Bridge Multicast
The Bridge Multicast screen (see figure 4-58) displays the ports and LAGs attached to the Multicast service group in the Ports
and LAGs tables. The Port and LAG tables also reflect the manner in which the port or LAGs joined the Multicast group. Ports
can be added either to existing groups or to new Multicast service groups.
This screen permits new Multicast service groups to be created, also assigns ports to a specific Multicast service address group,
and included two areas, Configuring Multicast and Multicast Table.
Figure 4-58 Bridge Multicast screen
The Page contains the following fields:
„
Configure Multicast
Enable Bridge
Multicast Filtering
VLAN ID
Bridge Multicast
Address
Interface
The check box allows enabling Bridge Multicast Filtering function.
This identifies a VLAN to be configured to a Multicast service.
Identifies the Multicast group MAC address/IP address.
Displays Interface that can be added to a Multicast service.
The configuration options are as follows:
• Static, indicates the port is user-defined.
• Dynamic, indicates the port is configured dynamically.
• Forbidden, forbidden ports are not included the Multicast group, even if IGMP
snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group.
• None, displays the port is not configured for Multicast service.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
LAG
Displays LAG that can be added to a Multicast service.
The fields are the same for both areas. se the Add to List button when you want to assigns ports to a specific Multicast
service address group.
„
Multicast Table
Figure 4-59 Bridge Multicast screen
Example:
„
Adding Bridge Multicast Addresses
1.
Click the check box to enable the Bridge Multicast Filtering.
2.
Define the VLAN ID and New Bridge Multicast Address fields.
3.
Check a port to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group.
4.
Click “Add to List” button.
5.
Click the “Save Config” to apply the sttings.
The bridge Multicast address is assigned to the Multicast group, and the device is updated.
„
Defining Ports to Receive Multicast Service
1.
Define the VLAN ID and the Bridge Multicast Address fields.
2.
Check and click a port to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group.
3.
Click “Add to List” button.
4.
Click the “Save Config” to apply the sttings.
5.
Select the VLAN ID to check if the entries be added.
The port is assigned to the Multicast group, and the device is updated.
„
Assigning LAGs to Receive Multicast Service
1.
Define the VLAN ID and the Bridge Multicast Address fields.
2.
Check and click the LAG to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group.
3.
Click “Add to List” button.
4.
Click the “Save Config” to apply the sttings.
The LAG is assigned to the Multicast group, and the device is updated.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.10.3 Bridge Multicast Forward All
The Bridge Multicast Forward All Screen contains fields for attaching ports or LAGs to a device attached to a neighboring
Multicast router/switch. Once IGMP Snooping is enabled, Multicast packets are forwarded to the appropriate port or VLAN.
Refer to figure 4-60.
Figure 4-60 Multicast Bridge Forward All screen
The Bridge Multicast Forward All Screen contains the following fields:
VLAN ID
For which Multicast parameters are displayed. This identifies a VLAN to be
configured to a Multicast service.
Interface
Displays Interface that can be added to a Multicast service.
The configuration options are as follows:
• Static, indicates the port is user-defined.
• Dynamic, indicates the port is configured dynamically.
• Forbidden, forbidden ports are not included the Multicast group, even if IGMP
snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group.
• None, displays the port is not configured for Multicast service.
LAG
Displays LAG that can be added to a Multicast service.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.11 SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) provides a method for managing network devices. Devices supporting SNMP
run a local software (agent).
The SNMP agents maintain a list of variables, which are used to manage the device. The variables are defined in the
Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB contains the variables controlled by the agent. The SNMP protocol defines the
MIB specification format, as well as the format used to access the information over the network.
Access rights to the SNMP agents are controlled by access strings. To communicate with the device, the Embedded Web
Server submits a valid community string for authentication.
4.11.1 Global Parameters
The Global Parameters screen (see figure 4-61) contains parameters for defining SNMP notification parameters.
Figure 4-61 SNMP Global Parameter
The Global Parameter Screen contains the following fields:
„
SNMPV3
Local Engine ID
Indicates the local device engine ID. The field value is a hexadecimal string. Each
byte in hexadecimal character strings consists of two hexadecimal digits. Each byte
can be separated by a period or a colon. The Engine ID must be defined before
SNMPv3 is enabled. For stand-alone devices, select a default Engine ID that is
comprised of Enterprise number and the default MAC address.
For a stackable system configure the Engine ID, and verify that the Engine ID is
unique for the administrative domain. This prevents two devices in a network from
having the same Engine ID.
Use Default
Uses the device generated Engine ID. It’s defined per standard as:
First 4 octets — first bit = 1, the rest is IANA Enterprise number. To locate the IANA
Enterprise number by referring to the Vendor website, or use the show SNMP
command using a CLI interface.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The default Engine ID is based on the device MAC address.
„
Notification
SNMP Notifications
This indicates if the device can send SNMP notifications.
Authentication Notifications This indicates if SNMP Authentication failure notification is enabled on the device.
4.11.2 Views
SNMP Views provide access or block access to device features or feature aspects. For example, a view can be defined that
states that SNMP Group A has Read Only (R/O) access to Multicast groups, while SNMP Group B has Read-Write (R/W)
access to Multicast groups. Feature access is granted via the MIB name, or MIB Object ID (refer to figure 4-62)
Figure 4-62 SNMP View screen
The page contains the following fields:
View Name
Indicates the user-defined views. The options are as follows:
• Default - which displays the default SNMP view for read and read/write views.
• DefaultSuper - indicates the default SNMP view for administrator views.
Subtree ID Tree
Indicates the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view.
The options to select the following Subtree:
Select from List
Insert
Select the Subtree from the list provided.
Enables a Subtree not included in the Select from List field to be entered.
-11
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
This indicates if the defined OID branch will be included or excluded in the
View Type
selected SNMP view.
Use the
button when you want to add the Views configuration to the Views Table at the bottom of the
screen.
4.11.3 Group Profile
The Group Profile screen (see figure 4-63) provides information for creating SNMP groups and assigning SNMP access control
privileges to SNMP groups. Groups allow network managers to assign access rights to specific device features, or features
aspects.
Figure 4-63 Group Profile screen
The page contains the following fields:
Group Name
Security Model
Displays the user-defined group to which access control rules are applied. The
field range is up to 30 characters.
Defines the SNMP version attached to the group. The possible field values are:
• SNMPv1, defined for the group.
• SNMPv2, defined for the group.
• SNMPv3, defined for the group.
Security Level
Defines the security level attached to the group. Security levels apply to SNMPv3
only. The possible field values are:
• No Authentication, which indicates that neither the Authentication nor the
Privacy security levels are assigned to the group.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
• Authentication, which authenticates SNMP messages, and ensures the
SNMP messages original is authenticated.
Privacy
Where encrypts SNMP messages.
Operation
Defines the group access rights. The possible field values are:
• Read. The management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot
be made to the assigned SNMP view.
• Write. The management access is read-write and changes can be made to the
assigned SNMP view.
• Notify. Sends traps for the assigned SNMP view.
4.11.4 Group Membership
The Group Membership screen (see figure 4-64) provides information for assigning SNMP access control privileges to SNMP
groups.
Figure 4-64 Group Membership
The page contains the following fields:
User name
By which provides a user-defined local user list.
Engine ID
Indicates either the local or remote SNMP entity to which the user is connected.
Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID deletes the SNMPv3 User
Database.
• Local - Indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP entity.
• Remote - Indicates that the user is connected to a remote SNMP entity. If the
Engine ID is defined, remote devices receive inform messages.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Group Name
Contains a list of user-defined SNMP groups. SNMP groups are defined in the
SNMP Group Profile page.
Authentication
Indicates the Authentication method used. The possible field values are:
Method
• None, that no authentication method is used to authenticate the port.
• MD5 Password, that port authentication is performed via HMAC-MD5-96
password authentication.
• SHA Password, that port authentication is performed via HMAC-SHA-96
password authentication.
• MD5 Key, that port authentication is performed via the HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
• SHA Key, that port authentication is performed via HMAC-SHA-96
authentication.
Password
Define the local user password. Local user passwords can contain up to 159
characters.
Authentication Key
Define the HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level. The
authentication and privacy keys are entered to define the authentication key.
If only authentication is required, 16 bytes are defined.
If both privacy and authentication are required, 32 bytes are defined.
Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte
can be separated by a period or a colon.
Privacy Key
Defines the Privacy Key (LSB).
If only authentication is required, 20 bytes are defined.
If both privacy and authentication are required, 36 bytes are defined.
Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte
can be separated by a period or colon.
Use the
button when you want to add the Group Membership configuration to the respective table at
the bottom of the screen.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.11.5 Communities
The Communities screen contains three areas:
• Communities
• Basic Table
• Advanced Table
The screens in Figure 4-65 and 4-66 sppears
„ Communities
Figure 4-65 Communities configuration screen
The page contains the following fields:
SNMP Management
Station
Community String
Basic
Advanced
Use the
Defines the management station IP address for which the advanced SNMP
community is defined. There are two definition options:
• IP Address - Define the management station IP address.
• All - which includes all management station IP addresses.
Defines the password used to authenticate the management station to the device.
which enables SNMP Basic mode for a selected community and contains the
following fields:
Access Mode - Defines the access rights of the community. The possible field
values are:
• Read Only - which indicates management access is restricted to read-only,
and changes cannot be made to the community.
• Read Write - management access is read-write and changes can be made to
the device configuration, but not to the community.
• SNMP Admin - user has access to all device configuration options, as well as
permissions to modify the community.
View Name - contains a list of user-defined SNMP views.
Enables SNMP Advanced Mode for a selected community and contains the
following fields:
Group Name - defines advanced SNMP communities group names.
button when you want to add the Communities configuration to the respective Table at the
bottom of the screen.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Figure 4-66 Communities table screen
„
Base Table
The page contains the following fields:
„
Management Station
Displays the management station IP address for which the basic
SNMP community is defined.
Community String
Displays the password used to authenticate the management station
to the device.
Access Mode
Where displays the access rights of the community.
View Name
Displays the user-defined SNMP view.
Advanced Table
Management Station
Displays the management station IP address for which the basic
SNMP community is defined.
Community String, which displays the password used to authenticate
the management station to the device.
Group Name
Displays advanced SNMP communities group name.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.11.6 Notification Filter
The Notification Filter screen (see figure 4-67) permits filtering traps based on OIDs. Each OID is linked to a device feature or a
feature aspect. The Notification Filter screen also allows network managers to filter notifications.
Figure 4-67 Notification Filter screen
The page contains the following fields:
Filter Name
This contains a list of user-defined notification filters.
New Filter Name
Add a new user-defined notification filter name.
New Object Identifier
Subtree
Displays the OID for which notifications are sent or blocked. If a filter
is attached to an OID, traps or informs are generated and sent to the
trap recipients. Object IDs are selected from either the Select from
List or the Object ID List. There are two configuration options:
Select from List, select the OID from the list provided.
Object ID, you can enter an OID not offered in the Select from List
option.
Indicates if informs or traps are sent regarding the OID to the trap
recipients.
Restricts sending OID traps or informs.
Sends OID traps or informs.
Filter Type
Excluded
Included
Use the
button when you want to add the Notification Filter configuration to the Notification Filter
Table at the bottom of the screen.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.11.7 Notification Recipient
The Notification Recipient screen (see figure 4-68 and 4-69) contains information for defining filters that determine whether traps
are sent to specific users, and the trap type sent.
Figure 4-68 Notification Recipient
The page contains the following fields:
Recipient IP
Which indicates the IP address to whom the traps are sent.
Notification Type
Defines the notification sent. The possible field values are:
Traps, indicates traps are sent.
Informs, indicates informs are sent.
SNMP v1.2
Enables SNMP v1.2 as the Notification Recipient. Either SNMP v1.2
or SNMPv3 can be enabled at any one time, but not both at the same
time. If String and Notification Version fields are enabled for
configuration:
• Community String, where identifies the community string of the
trap manager.
• Notification Version, determines the trap type. The possible
field values are:
SNMP V3
ƒ
SNMP V1, which indicates SNMP Version 1 traps are sent.
ƒ
SNMP V2, which indicates SNMP Version 2 traps are sent.
This enables SNMPv3 as the Notification Recipient. Either SNMPv1.2
or SNMP V3, enabled at any one time, but not both at the same time.
If SNMP V3, which is enabled, the User Name and Security Level
fields are enabled for configuration:
• User Name - defines the user to whom SNMP notifications are
sent.
Security Level
Defines the means by which the packet is authenticated. The possible
field values are:
• No Authentication. Indicates the packet is neither authenticated
nor encrypted.
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
• Authentication, which indicates the packet is authenticated.
• Privacy, which indicates the packet is both authenticated and
encrypted.
UDP Port
Displays the UDP port used to send notifications.
The default is 162.
Filter Name
Indicates if the SNMP filter for which the SNMP Notification filter is
defined.
Timeout
Indicates the amount of time (seconds) the device waits before
resending informs.
The default is 15 seconds.
Retries
Indicates the amount of times the device resends an inform request.
The default is 3 seconds.
Use the
button when you want to add the Notification Recipient configuration to the relevant table
at the bottom of the screen.
Figure 4-69 Notification Recipient
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.12 Admin
The Admin section provides information for devining system parameters including User account and file management, device
software. Under Admin the folling topics are provided to devine and view the system informatin:
„
User Authentication
„
Static Address
„
Dynamic Address
„
Logging
„
Port Mirroting
„
Cable Test
„
Storm Control
„
Save Configuration
„
Jumbo Frame
„
Firmware Upgrade
„
Reboot
„
Factory Default
„
Server Logs
„
Memory Logs
„
Flash Logs
4.12.1 User Authentication
The User Authentication screen (see figure 4-70) is used to modify user passwords.
Figure 4-70 User Authentication screen
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Authentication Type
Defines the user authentication methods. Also you can choose combinations of all
the authentication methods. The possible field values are:
• Local, authenticates the user at the device level. The device checks the user
name and password for authentication.
• RADIUS, where authenticates the user at the RADIUS server.
• TACACS+, which authenticates the user at the TACACS+ server.
• None, assigns none authentication method to the authentication profile.
User Name
Displays the user name.
Password
Specifies the new password. The password is not displayed. As it entered an “*”
corresponding to each character is displayed in the field. (Range: 1-159 characters)
Confirm Password
This confirms the new password. The password entered into this field must be
exactly the same as the password entered in the Password field.
Use the
button when you want to add the user configuration to the Local User’s Table.
4.12.2 Static Address
A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and
cannot be moved. When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be written to the
address table (see figure 4-71).
Figure 4-71 Static Address screen
-12
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Interface
Displays the interface to which the entry refers:
• Port, to which the specific port number the forwarding database parameters
refer.
• LAG, to which the specific LAG number the forwarding database parameters
refer. MAC Address, which displays the MAC address to which the entry refers.
VLAN ID
Displays the VLAN ID number to which the entry refers.
VLAN Name
Which displays the VLAN name to which the entry refers.
Status
Displays how the entry was created. The possible field values are:
• Permanent, the MAC address is permanent.
• Delete on Reset, the MAC address is deleted when the device is reset.
• Delete on Timeout, the MAC address is deleted when a timeout occurs.
• Secure, the MAC Address is defined for locked ports.
„
Query
Port
Specifies the interface is queried. There are two interface types from which to
select.
• Port, displays the specific port number.
• LAG, the specific LAG number.
MAC Address
Specifies the MAC address for which the table is queried. VLAN ID, which specifies
the VLAN ID for which the table is queried.
Address Table Sort
Specifies the means by which the Dynamic MAC Address Table is sorted. The
address table can be sorted by -
Key
• VLAN
• Address
• Interface
Use the
button to apply the static MAC address settings.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.12.3 Dynamic Address
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the
switch. When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are
forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.
The Dynamic Address screen (see figure 4-72) contains parameters for querying information in the Dynamic MAC Address
Table, including the interface type, MAC addresses, VLAN, and table storing. The Dynamic MAC Address table contains
information about the aging time before a dynamic MAC address is erased, and includes parameters for querying and viewing
the Dynamic MAC Address table. The Dynamic MAC Address table contains address parameters by which packets are directly
forwarded to the ports. The Dynamic Address Table can be sorted by interface, VLAN, and MAC Address.
Figure 4-72 Dynamic Address screen
The page contains the following fields:
„
Address Aging
Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) the MAC addresses remains in the
Dynamic MAC Address table before it times out, if no traffic from the source is
detected. The default value is 300 seconds.
Clear Table
If checked, clears the MAC address table.
Query
Port
Specifies the interface for which the table is queried. There are two interface types
from which to select:
• Port - displays the specific port number.
• LAG - displays the specific LAG number.
MAC Address
Specifies the MAC address for which the table is queried.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
VLAN ID
Specifies the VLAN ID for which the table is queried.
Address Table Sort
Specifies the means by which the Dynamic MAC Address table is sorted by
address, VLAN, or interface.
Key
4.12.4 Logging
The System Logs enable viewing device events in real time, and recording the events for later usage. System Logs record and
manage events and report errors or informational messages (see figure 4-73).
Figure 4-73 Loggin screen
Event messages have a unique format, as per the SYSLOG protocols recommended message format for all error reporting. For
example, System logs and local device reporting messages are assigned a severity code, and include a message mnemonic,
which identifies the source application generating the message. It allows messages to be filtered based on their urgency or
relevancy. Each message severity determines the set of event logging devices that are sent per each event logging.
The page contains the following fields:
Logging
Indicates if device global logs for Cache, File, and Server Logs are enabled.
Console logs are enabled by default.
Emergency
The system is not functioning.
Alert
The system needs immediate attention.
Critical
The system is in a critical state.
Error
A system error has occurred.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Warning
A system warning has occurred.
Notice
The system is functioning properly, but system notice has occurred.
Informational
Provides device information.
Debug
Provides detailed information about the log. If a Debug error occurs, contact
Customer Tech Support.
4.12.5 Port Mirroring
Port mirroring monitors and mirrors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from one port to a
monitoring port. Port mirroring can be used as diagnostic tool and/or a debugging feature. Port mirroring also enables switch
performance monitoring (refer to figure 4-74).
Network administrators configure port mirroring by selecting a specific port to copy all packets, and different ports from which
the packets are copied.
Figure 4-74 Port Mirroring screen
The page contains the following fields:
Source Port
Defines the port to which traffic is mirrored.
Type
Indicates the port mode configuration for port mirroring. The possible field values
are:
• RxOnly, defines the port mirroring on receiving ports. This is the default value.
• TxOnly, defines the port mirroring on transmitting ports.
• Both, which defines the port mirroring on both receiving and transmitting ports.
Target Port, defines the port from which traffic is mirrored.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.12.6 Cable Test
The Cable Test screen (see figure 4-75) shows you results from performance tests on copper cables. The maximum cable
length that can be tested is 120 meters. Cables are tested when the ports are in the down state, except for the Approximate
Cable Length test.
Figure 4-75 Cable Test screen
The page contains the following fields:
Port
Test Result
This is the port to which the cable is connected.
• OK - indicates that the cable passed the test.
• No Cable - means no cable connected to the port.
• Open Cable -means the cable is connected on only one side.
• Short Cable - indicates that a short has occurred in the cable.
Cable Fault Distance
This is the distance from the port at which the cable error occurred.
Last Update
This is the last time the port was tested.
Cable Length
This is the approximate length of the cable.
The Cable Length test can be performed only when the port is up and operating at
1Gbps.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.12.7 Save Configuration
On this screen, you can choose two methods to save the configuration: Via TFTP Upgrade and Via HTTP. See figure 4-76
Figure 4-76 Save Configuration via TFTP
The page contains the following fields:
„
„
Via TFTP
Via TFTP Upgrade
Select this option to upgrade the switch from a file located on a TFTP Server.
TFTP Server
The TFTP Server IP Address that contains the source files to upgrade from.
Source File
Specifies the name of the upgrade file on the TFTP Server.
Destination File
Where specifies the name of the configuration file. The default is StartupCfg.
Via HTTP
This HTTP Firmware Upgrade screen is used for saving configuration information using your Web browser. See figure 4-77
Figure 4-77 Save Configuration via HTTP
Upgrade
Select this option to upgrade the switch from a file on the local hard drive.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Backup
This is used to backup the configuration to the local hard drive.
Source File
Type in the name and path of the file or Browse to locate the upgrade file.
Use the Proceed button to save configuration via TFTP or HHTP that be selected.
4.12.8 Jumbo Frame
On this screen, you can choose the jumbo frame function “disable” or “enable”. See figure 4-78
Figure 4-78 Jumbo Frames screen
4.12.9 Firmware Upgrade
The Firmware Upgrade screen contains the following fields:
See figure 4-79
Figure 4-79 Firmware Upgrade via TFTP
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
„
Via TFTP
Via TFTP
Defines the upgrade through a TFTP Server.
File Type
Select file type to be upgraded through a TFTP Server. The possible field values
are :
• Software Image.
• Boot Code.
„
TFTP Server
The TFTP Server IP Address that contains the source file to upgrade from.
Source File
Specifies the name of the upgrade file on the TFTP Server.
Destination File
Type in the name and path of the file or Browse to locate the upgrade file.
Via HTTP
See figure 4-80
Figure 4-80 Firmware Upgrade via HTTP
Via HTTP
Allows you to upgrade the firmware using your Web browser.
Source File Name
Specifies the file to be downloaded.
Use the Proceed button to upgrade the firmware via TFTP or HHTP that be selected.
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4.12.10 Reboot
The Reboot screen (see figure 4-81) resets the device whose configuration is automatically saved before the device is rebooted.
Figure 4-81 Reboot screen
#Notice:
There is a known issue. Sometimes after the “Reboot” button be pressed, it costs lot time to
stop the curent tasks. So it might be rebooted after more then 5 minutes.
4.12.11 Factory Defaults
The Factory Reset screen (see figure 4-82) allows network managers to reset the device to the factory defaults settings, but if
you restore factory defaults results in erasing the configuration file. Although restoring the factory defaults will erase your
configuration, you can save a backup of your current configuration settings from the Admin - Save Configuration screen.
Figure 4-82 Factory Default screen
4.12.12 Server Logs
The Global Log Parameters page contains fields for enabling logs globally, and fields for defining log parameters. The Severity
log messages are listed from the highest severity to the lowest.
Event messages have a unique format, as per the SYSLOG RFC recommended message format for all error reporting. For
example, Syslog+ local device reporting. Messages are assigned a severity code, and include a message mnemonic, which
identifies the source application generating the message. Messages are filtered based on their urgency or relevancy. The
severity of each message determines the set of event logging devices to which are sent for each event logging device. The
following table contains the Log Severity Levels:
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Severity Type
Severity
Level
Description
Example
Emergency
0
The system is not functioning.
Memories overflow.
Alert
1
The system needs immediate
attention.
Main system memory
pool overflow.
Critical
2
The system is in a critical state.
Cannot bind to SNMP.
Error
3
A system error has occurred.
Failed to delete entry.
Warning
4
A system warning has occurred.
Port down.
Notice
5
The system is functioning properly,
but system notice has occurred.
Bad route.
Informational
6
Provides device information.
Link up.
Debug
7
Provides detailed information about
the log. If a Debug error occurs,
contact Dell Online Technical Support
Method list created.
The Server Logs screen (see figure 4-83) contains information for viewing and configuring the Remote Log Servers. New log
servers can be defined, and the log severity sent to each server.
Figure 4-83 Server Logs screen
-13
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
There are five items, as below:
Server
Specifies the server to which logs can be sent.
UDP Port (1-65535)
Defines the UDP port to which the server logs are sent. The possible range is 1 to
65535.
The default value is 514.
Defines a user-defined application from which system logs are sent to the remote
server. Only one facility can be assigned to a single server. If a second facility level
is assigned, the first facility is overridden. All applications defined for a device utilize
the same facility on a server. The possible field values are Local 0 - Local 7.
Facility
The field default is Local 7.
Description
Where provides a user-defined server description.
Minimum Severity
Indicates the Minimum severity from which logs are sent to the server. For example,
if Notice is selected, all logs from a Notice severity and higher are sent to the
remote server.
If you want to add the Server Log configuration to the Server Log Table, use the Add to List button at the bottom of the screen.
#Notice:
When a severity level is selected, all severity level choices above the selection are selected automatically.
4.12.13 Memory Logs
The Memory Log screen (see figure 4-84) contains all system logs in a chronological order that are saved in RAM (Cache), Log
Index which shows the log number, Log Time at which the log was generated, Severity which shows the log severity, and the
description that shows log message text.
Figure 4-84 Memory Logs screen
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The page contains the following fields:
Log Index
The log number in the Log File Table.
Log Time
Specifies the time at which the log was entered in the Log File Table.
Severity
Specifies the log severity.
Description
The log message text.
4.12.14 Flash Logs
The Flash Log screen (see figure 4-85) contains information about log entries saved to the Log File in FLASH, the time that the
log generated, the log severity, and description of the log message. The Message Log is available after reboot.
Figure 4-85 Flash Logs screen
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5. COMMAND STRUCTURE
The WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040 is a managed Ethernet Switch that can be controlled by the RS-232 console interface, telnet
interface, and Web interface. This chapter describer how to configure the Switch through these interfaces.
When you are ready to configure the smart functions of the Switch, make sure you had connected the supplied RS-232 serial
cable to the RS-232 port at the front panel of your WGSW-24010 Switch and your PC.
5.1 Connect to PC’s RS-232 serial port
Hyper Terminal
In Windows 98/2000/XP, launch “HyperTerminal”, create a new connection, and adjust settings as below:
ƒ
Baud per second: 38400
ƒ
Data bits: 8
ƒ
Parity: None
ƒ
Stop bits: 1
ƒ
Flow Control: None
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.2 Using the CLI
5.2.1 CLI Command Modes
The Command Line Interface (CLI) syntax, conventions and terminology are described in this section. Each CLI command is
illustrated using the structure outlined below.
Introduction
To assist in configuring devices, the CLI command-line interface is divided into different command modes. Each command
mode has its own set of specific commands. Entering a question mark "?" at the system prompt (console prompt) displays a list
of commands available for that particular command mode.
From each mode a specific command is used to navigate from one command mode to another. The standard order to access
the modes is as follows: User EXEC mode, Privileged EXEC mode, Global Configuration mode, and Interface Configuration
mode. The following figure illustrates the command mode access path.
When starting a session, the initial mode is the User EXEC mode. Only a limited subset of commands is available in User EXEC
Mode. This level is reserved for tasks that do not change the configuration. To enter the next level, the Privileged EXEC mode, a
password is required.
The Privileged mode gives access to commands that are restricted on EXEC mode and provides access to the device
Configuration mode.
The Global Configuration mode manages the device configuration on a global level. For specific interface configurations enter
the next level, the Interface Configuration Mode.
The Interface Configuration mode configures specific interfaces in the device.
User EXEC Mode
After logging into the device, the user is automatically in user EXEC command mode unless the user is defined as a privileged
user. In general, the user EXEC commands allow the user to perform basic tests, and list system information.
The user-level prompt consists of the device "host name" followed by the angle bracket (>).
console >
The default host name is "Console" unless it has been changed using the hostname command in the Global Configuration
mode.
Privileged EXEC Mode
Because many of the privileged commands set operating parameters, privileged access is password protected to prevent
unauthorized use. The password is not displayed on the screen and is case sensitive.
Privileged users are entered directly into the Privileged EXEC mode. To enter the Privileged EXEC mode commands from the
User EXEC mode perform the following: At the prompt enter the command enable and press <Enter>. A password prompt is
displayed. Enter the password and press <Enter>. The password is displayed as "*". The privileged EXEC mode prompt is
displayed. The Privileged EXEC mode prompt consists of the device "host name" followed by "#".
console #
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
To return from Privileged mode to User EXEC mode, use the following disable commands.
The following example illustrates how to access Privileged mode and return back to the User EXEC mode:
console > enable
enter Password: * * * * *
console #
console # disable
console >
Exit is used to move back from any mode to a previous level mode, except from Privileged EXEC to User EXEC mode, for
example from Interface Configuration mode to Global Configuration mode, and from Global Configuration mode to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Global Configuration Mode
Global configuration commands apply to features that affect the system as a whole, rather than just a specific interface. The
Privileged EXEC mode command configure is used to enter the Global Configuration mode.
The Global Configuration mode commands perform the following:
At the Privileged EXEC mode prompt enter the command configure and press <Enter>. The Global Configuration mode
prompt is displayed. The Global Configuration mode prompt consists of the device "host name" followed by the word "(config)"
and "#".
console #
To return from Global Configuration mode to Privileged EXEC mode, the user can use one of the following commands:
ƒ
exit
ƒ
end
ƒ
Ctrl+Z
The following example illustrates how to access Global Configuration mode and teturn back to the Privileged EXEC mode:
console #
console # configure
console(config) # exit
console #
Interface Configuration Mode and Specific Configuration Modes
Interface Configuration commands are to modify specific interface operations. The following are the Interface Configuration
modes:
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
Line Interface—Contains commands to configure the management connections. These include commands such as line
speed, timeout settings, etc. The Global Configuration mode command line is used to enter the line configuration
command mode.
ƒ
VLAN Database—Contains commands to create a VLAN as a whole. The Global Configuration mode command vlan
database is used to enter the VLAN Database Interface Configuration mode.
ƒ
Management Access List—Contains commands to define management access-lists. The Global Configuration mode
command management access-list is used to enter the Management Access List Configuration mode.
ƒ
Ethernet—Contains commands to manage port configuration. The Global Configuration mode command interface
ethernet enters the Interface Configuration mode to configure an Ethernet type interface.
ƒ
Port Channel—Contains commands to configure port-channels, for example, assigning ports to a VLAN or port-channel.
Most of these commands are the same as the commands in the Ethernet interface mode, and are used to manage the
member ports as a single entity. The Global Configuration mode command interface port-channel is used to enter the
port-channel Interface Configuration mode.
ƒ
SSH Public Key-chain—Contains commands to manually specify other device SSH public keys. The Global
Configuration mode command crypto key pubkey-chain ssh is used to enter the SSH Public Key-chain Configuration
mode.
ƒ
MAC Access-List—Configures conditions required to allow traffic based on MAC addresses. The Global Configuration
mode command mac-access list is used to enter the MAC access-list configuration mode.
ƒ
Interface—Contains commands that configure the interface. The Global Configuration mode command interface
ethernet is used to enter the interface configuration mode.
5.2.2 Starting the CLI
The switch can be managed over a direct connection to the switch console port, or via a Telnet connection. The switch can also
be managed via an out-of-band (OOB) management port. The switch is managed by entering command keywords and
parameters at the prompt. Using the switch command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX
system.
If access is via a Telnet connection, ensure that the device has an IP address defined, that corresponding management access
is granted, and that the workstation used to access the device is connected to the device prior to beginning using CLI
commands.
#Noice: The following steps are for use on the console line only.
To begin running CLI, perform the following:
1. Start the device and wait until the startup procedure is complete.
2. The User Exec mode is entered into, and the prompt "console>" is displayed.
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
3. Configure the device and enter the necessary commands to complete the required tasks.
4. When finished, exit the session with the quit or exit command.
When a different user is required to log onto the system, in the Privileged EXEC Command mode the login command is entered.
This effectively logs off the current user and logs on the new user.
5.2.3 Editing Features
Entering Commands
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a command, and arguments specify configuration
parameters. For example, in the command "show interfaces status ethernet e5," show, interfaces and status are keywords,
ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and e5 specifies the port.
When entering commands, the Giga ports are referred to with a prefix "g", and the 10/100 Mbps ports are referred to with a
prefix "e". The ports are preceded by the unit number. The unit number for a standalone device is 1.
To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after the command keyword. For example, to set a
password for the administrator, enter:
console(config)# username admin password smith
When working with the CLI, the command options are not displayed. The command is not selected by a menu but is manually
entered. To see what commands are available in each mode or within an interface configuration, the CLI does provide a method
of displaying the available commands, the command syntax requirements and in some instances parameters required to
complete the command. The standard command to request help is the ?.
There are three instances where the help information can be displayed:
ƒ
Keyword lookup—The character ? is entered in place of a command. A list of all valid commands and corresponding
help messages are displayed.
ƒ
Partial keyword lookup—A command is incomplete and the character ? is entered in place of a parameter. The
matched parameters for this command are displayed.
ƒ
To assist in using the CLI, there is an assortment of editing features. The following features are described:
ƒ
Terminal Command Buffer
ƒ
Command Completion
ƒ
Keyboard Shortcuts
Every time a command is entered in the CLI, it is recorded on an internally managed Command History buffer. Commands are
stored in the buffer which is maintained on a First In First Out (FIFO) basis. These commands can be recalled, reviewed,
modified, and reissued. This buffer is not preserved across device resets.
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Keyword
Source or destination
Up-arrow key
Recalls commands in the history buffer, beginning with the most recent command.
Ctrl+P
Repeats the key sequence to recall successively older commands.
Down-arrow
Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with
key
the up-arrow key. Repeating the key sequence will recall successively more recent
commands.
By default, the history buffer system is enabled, but it can be disabled at any time. For information about the command syntax to
enable or disable the history buffer, see history.
There is a standard default number of commands that are stored in the buffer. The standard number of 10 commands can be
increased to 256. By configuring 0, the effect is the same as disabling the history buffer system. For information about the
command syntax for configuring the command history buffer, see history size.
To display the history buffer, see show history.
Negating the Effect of Commands
For many configuration commands, the prefix keyword no can entered to cancel the effect of a command or reset the
configuration to the default value. This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands.
Command Completion
If a command is entered and it is not complete, if the command is invalid, or if some parameters of the command are invalid
or missing, the appropriate error message is displayed. This assists in entering the correct command. By pressing the <Tab>
button, an incomplete command is entered. If the characters already entered are not enough for the system to identify a
single matching command, press "?" to display the available commands matching the characters already entered.
Incorrect or incomplete commands are automatically re-entered next to the cursor. If a parameter must be added, the parameter
can be added to the basic command already displayed next to the cursor. The following example indicated that the command
interface ethernet requires the parameter <port-num>.
(config) # interface ethernet
%missing mandatory parameter
(config) # interface ethernet e5
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Keyboard Shortcuts
The CLI has a range of keyboard shortcuts to assist in editing the CLI commands. The following table describes the CLI
shortcuts.
Keyboard
Key Description
Up-arrow key
Recalls commands in the history buffer, beginning with the most recent command.
Repeat the key sequence to recall successively older commands.
Down-arrow key
Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands
with the up arrow key. Repeating the key sequence will recall successively more
recent commands.
Ctrl+A
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line.
Ctrl+E
Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.
Ctrl+Z / End
Returns back to the Privileged EXEC mode from all modes.
Backspace key
Moves the cursor back one space.
CLI Command Conventions
When entering commands there are certain command entry standards which apply to all commands. The following table
describes the command conventions.
Convention
Description
[]
In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional entry.
{}
In a command line, curly brackets indicate a selection of compulsory parameters
separated by the | character. One option must be selected. For example:
flowcontrol {auto|on|off} means that for the flowcontrol command either auto,
on or off must be selected.
Italic font
Indicates a parameter.
<Enter>
Any individual key on the keyboard. For example click <Enter>.
Ctrl+F4
Any combination keys pressed simultaneously on the keyboard.
Screen
Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the console.
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Display
all
When a parameter is required to define a range of ports or parameters and all is an
option, the default for the command is all when no parameters are defined. For
example, the command interface range port-channel has the option of either
entering a range of channels, or selecting all. When the command is entered
without a parameter, it automatically defaults to all.
5.3 AAA Commands
5.3.1 aaa authentication login
The aaa authentication login global configuration command defines login authentication. To return to the default configuration,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
aaa authentication login {default | list-name} method1 [method2...]
no aaa authentication login {default | list-name}
ƒ
Default — Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user
logs in.
ƒ
list-name—Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when a user logs in.
ƒ
method1 [method2...]—Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
enable
Uses the enable password for authentication.
line
Uses the line password for authentication.
local
Uses the local username database for authentication
none
Uses no authentication.
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication. Uses username
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication. Uses username
Default Configuration
The local user database is checked. This has the same effect as the command aaa authentication login listname local.
#Notice: On the console, login succeeds without any authentication check if the authentication method is not defined.
-14
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication login command are used with the login
authentication command.
Create a list by entering the aaa authentication login list-name method command for a particular protocol, where list-name is
any character string used to name this list. The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm
tries, in the given sequence.
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line.
Example
The following example configures authentication login.
console (config) # aaa authentication login default radius local enable none
5.3.2 aaa authentication enable
The aaa authentication enable global configuration command defines authentication method lists for accessing higher
privilege levels. To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command.
Syntax
aaa authentication enable {default | list-name} method1 [method2...]
no aaa authentication enable default
ƒ
default — Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods,when using
higher privilege levels.
ƒ
list-name — Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated, when using accesshigher
privilege levels.
ƒ
method1 [method2...]—Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
Enable
Uses the enable password for authentication.
Line
Uses the line password for authentication
None
Uses no authentication
Radius
Uses the list of all radius servers for authentication. Uses username “$enabx$.” Where x
is the privilege level
Tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS+ servers for authentication. Uses username “$enabx$.”
Where x is the privilege level.
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
If the default list is not set, only the enable password is checked. This has the same effect as the command aaa authentication
enable default enable.
On the console, the enable password is used if it exists. If no password is set, the process still succeeds. This has the same
effect as using the command aaa authentication enable default enable none.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication enable command are used with the enable
authentication command.
Create a list by entering the aaa authentication enable list-name method command where list-name is any character string
used to name this list. The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries, in the given
sequence.
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line.
All aaa authentication enable default requests sent by the router to a RADIUS server include the username
"$enabx$.", where x is the requested privilege level.
Example
The following example sets authentication when accessing higher privilege levels.
console (config) # aaa authentication enable default enable
5.3.3 login authentication
The login authentication line configuration command specifies the login authentication method list for a remote telnet or console.
To return to the default specified by the authentication login command, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
login authentication {default | list-name}
no login authentication
ƒ
default — Uses the default list created with the authentication login command.
ƒ
list-name — Uses the indicated list created with the authentication login command.
Default Configuration
Uses the default set with the command authentication login.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
Changing login authentication from default to another value may disconnect the telnet session.
Example
The following example specifies the default authentication method for a remote Telnet or console.
console (config) # line cnsole
console (config-line) # login authentication default
5.3.4 enable authentication
The enable authentication line configuration command specifies the authentication method list when accessing a higher
privilege level from a remote telnet or console. To return to the default specified by the enable authentication command, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
enable authentication {default | list-name}
no enable authentication
ƒ
default — Uses the default list created with the authentication enable command.
ƒ
list-name — Uses the indicated list created with the authentication enable command.
Default Configuration
Uses the default set with the command authentication enable.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example specifies the default authentication method when accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet
or console.
console (config) # line cnsole
console (config-line) # enable authentication default
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.3.5 ip http authentication
The ip http authentication global configuration mode command specifies authentication methods for http. To return to the
default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http authentication method1 [method2...]
no ip http authentication
ƒ
method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table
Keyword
Source or destination
local
Uses the local username database for authentication
none
Uses no authentication
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication
Default Configuration
The local user database is checked. This has the same effect as the command ip http authentication local.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line.
Example
The following example configures the http authentication.
console (config) # ip http authentication radius local
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.3.6 ip https authentication
The ip https authentication global configuration command specifies authentication methods for https servers. To return to the
default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip https authentication method1 [method2...]
no ip https authentication
ƒ
method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
local
Uses the local username database for authentication
none
Uses no authentication
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication
Default Configuration
The local user database is checked. This has the same effect as the command ip https authentication local.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line.
Example
The following example configures https authentication.
console (config) # ip https authentication radius local
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.3.7 show authentication methods
The authentication methods privilege EXEC command displays information about the authentication methods.
Syntax
show authentication methods
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the authentication configuration.
console# show authentication methods
Login Authentication Method Lists
----------------------------------Default: Radius, Local, Line
Console_Login: Line, None
Enable Authentication Method Lists
----------------------------------Default: Radius, Enable
Console_Enable: Enable, None
Line
------------------------Console
Telnet
SSH
Login Method List
---------------------------------------Console_Login
Default
Default
Enable Method List
----------------------------------Console_Enable
Default
Default
HTTP: Radius, local
HTTPS: Radius, local
802.1x: Radius
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.3.8 password
The password line configuration command specifies a password on a line. To remove the password, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
password password [encrypted]
no password
ƒ
password — Password for this level, from 1 to 159 characters in length.
ƒ
encrypted — Encrypted password to be entered, copied from another device configuration.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example specifies a password "abc" on a line.
console (config-line) # password abc
5.3.9 enable password
The enable password global configuration command sets a local password to control access to normal and privilege levels. To
remove the password requirement, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
enable password [level level] password [encrypted]
no enable password [level level]
ƒ
password — Password for this level, from 1 to 159 characters in length.
ƒ
level level — Level for which the password applies. If not specified the level is 15 (Range: 1-15).
ƒ
encrypted — Encrypted password entered, copied from another device configuration.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
The following example sets a local level 15 password "abc" to control access to user and privilege levels.
console (config-line) # enable password level 15 abc
5.3.10 username
The username global configuration command establishes a username-based authentication system. To remove a user name
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
username name [password password] [privilege level] [encrypted]
no username
ƒ
name — The name of the user.
ƒ
password — The authentication password for the user, from 1 to 159 characters in length.
ƒ
level — The user level (Range: 1 -15).
ƒ
encrypted — Encrypted password entered, copied from another device configuration.
Default Configuration
The default privilege level is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Up to 30 users can be defined on the device.
Example
The following example configures user "bob" with the password "lee" and user level 15 to the system.
console (config)# username bob password lee level 15
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.3.11 show users accounts
The show users accounts privileged EXEC command displays information about the local user database.
Syntax
show users accounts
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the local users configured with access to the system.
console (config)# show users accounts
Username
Privilege
---------------
-------------
Bob
15
Robert
15
5.4 Address Table Commands
5.4.1 bridge address
The bridge address VLAN interface configuration command adds a static MAC-layer station source address to the bridge table.
To delete the MAC address, use the no form of the bridge address command (using the no form of the command without
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
specifying a MAC address deletes all static MAC addresses belonging to this VLAN).
Syntax
bridge address mac-address {ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number} [permanent | delete-onreset |
delete-on-timeout | secure]
no bridge address [mac-address]
ƒ
mac-address — A valid MAC address.
ƒ
Interface — A valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel number.
ƒ
permanent — The address can only deleted by the no bridge address command.
ƒ
delete-on-reset — The address is deleted after reset.
ƒ
delete-on-timeout — The address is deleted after "age out" time has expired.
ƒ
secure — The address is deleted after the port changes mode to unlock learning (no port security command). This
parameter is only available when the port is in learning locked mode.
Default Configuration
No static addresses are defined. The default mode for an added address is permanent.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example adds a permanent static MAC-layer station source address 3aa2.64b3.a245 on port e8 to the bridge
table.
console (config)# interface vlan 2
console (config-vlan)# bridge address 3aa2.64b3.a245 ethernet e8 permanent
5.4.2 bridge multicast filtering
The bridge multicast filtering global configuration command enables filtering of multicast addresses. To disable filtering of
multicast addresses, use the no form of the bridge multicast filtering command.
Syntax
bridge multicast filtering
no bridge multicast filtering
-15
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
Disabled. All multicast addresses are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If multicast routers exist on the VLAN and IGMP-snooping is not enabled, the bridge multicast forward-all command should
be used to enable forwarding all multicast packets to the multicast routers.
Example
In this example, bridge multicast filtering is enabled.
console (config)# bridge multicast filtering
5.4.3 bridge multicast address
The bridge multicast address interface configuration command registers MAC-layer multicast addresses to the bridge table,
and adds static ports to the group. To unregister the MAC address, use the no form of the bridge multicast address command.
Syntax
bridge multicast address {mac-multicast-address | ip-multicast-address}
bridge multicast address {mac-multicast-address | ip-multicast-address} [add | remove] {ethernet interface-list | port-channel
port-channel-number-list}
no bridge multicast address {mac-multicast-address | ip-multicast-address}
ƒ
add — Adds ports to the group. If no option is specified, this is the default option.
ƒ
remove — Removes ports from the group.
ƒ
mac-multicast-address — MAC multicast address.
ƒ
ip- multicast-address — IP multicast address.
ƒ
interface-list — Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is used to designate a
range of ports.
ƒ
port-channel-number-list — Separate nonconsecutive port-channels with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is used to
designate a range of ports.
Default Configuration
No multicast addresses are defined.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
If the command is executed without add or remove, the command only registers the group in the bridge database. Static
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
multicast addresses can only be defined on static VLANs.
Examples
The following example registers the MAC address:
console (config)# interface vlan 8
console (config-if)# bridge multicast address 0100.5e02.0203
The following example registers the MAC address and adds ports statically.
console (config)# interface vlan 8
console (config-if)# bridge multicast address 0100.5e02.0203 add Ethernet g1-9
5.4.4 bridge multicast forbidden address
The bridge multicast forbidden address interface configuration command forbids adding a specific multicast address to
specific ports.
Syntax
bridge multicast forbidden address {mac-multicast-address | ip-multicast-address} {add | remove} {Ethernet interface-list |
port-channel port-channel-number-list}
no bridge multicast forbidden address {mac-multicast-address | ip-multicast-address}
ƒ
add — Adds ports to the group.
ƒ
remove — Removes ports from the group.
ƒ
mac-multicast-address — MAC multicast address.
ƒ
ip- multicast-address — IP multicast address.
ƒ
interface-list — Separate non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces; hyphen is used to
designate a range of ports.
ƒ
port-channel-number-list — Separate non consecutive valid port-channels with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is
used to designate a range of port-channels.
ƒ
ƒ
Default Configuration
No forbidden addresses are defined.
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
Before defining forbidden ports, the multicast group should be registered.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Examples
In this example the MAC address 0100.5e02.0203 is forbidden on port g9 within VLAN 8.
console (config)# interface vlan 8
console (config-if)# bridge multicast address 0100.5e02.0203
console (config-if)# bridge multicast forbidden address 0100.5e02.0203 add ethernet e9
3.4.5 bridge multicast forward-unregistered
The bridge multicast forward-unregistered interface configuration command enables forwarding unregistered multicast
addresses. Use the no form of this command to return to default.
Syntax
bridge multicast forward-unregistered {add | remove} {ethernet interface-list | port-channel port-channelnumber-list }
no bridge multicast forward-unregistered
ƒ
add — Force forwarding of unregistered multicast packets.
ƒ
remove — Don’t force forwarding of unregistered multicast packets.
ƒ
interface-list — Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a
range of ports. (Range: Valid Ethernet port)
ƒ
port-channel-number-list — Separate nonconsecutive port-channels with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to
designate a range of port-channels. (Range: Valid Port-channel number)
Default Configuration
Forward
Command Modes
Interface configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
If routers exist on the VLAN, do not change the unregistered multicast addresses state to drop on the routers
ports.
Examples
This example enables forwarding unregistered multicast addresses within VLAN 8.
console (config)# interface vlan 8
console (config-if)# bridge multicast forward-unregistered add ethernet 1- 9
5.4.6 bridge multicast forbidden forward-unregistered
The bridge multicast forbidden forward-unregistered interface configuration command forbids a port to be a
Forwarding-unregistered-multicast-addresses port. Use the no form of this command to return to default.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
bridge multicast forbidden forward-unregistered {add | remove} {ethernet interface-list | port-channel portchannelnumber-list }
no bridge multicast forbidden forward-unregistered
ƒ
add — Forbid forwarding unregistered multicast packets.
ƒ
remove — Don’t forbid forwarding unregistered multicast packets.
ƒ
interface-list — Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a
range of ports. (Range: Valid Ethernet port)
ƒ
port-channel-number-list — Separate nonconsecutive port-channels with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to
designate a range of port-channels. (Range: Valid Port-channel number)
Default Configuration
Not forbidden
Command Modes
Interface configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
This example forbids port 1 to be a Forwarding-unregistered-multicast-addresses port within VLAN 8.
console (config)# interface vlan 8
console (config-if)# bridge multicast forward-unregistered add ethernet 1
5.4.7 bridge multicast forward-all
The bridge multicast forward-all interface configuration command enables forwarding of all multicast packets on a port. To
restore the default, use the no form of the bridge multicast forward-all command.
Syntax
bridge multicast forward-all {add | remove} {ethernet interface-list | port-channel port-channel-number-list}
no bridge multicast forward-all
ƒ
add — Adds ports to the group.
ƒ
remove — Removes ports from the group.
ƒ
interface-list — Separate non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is used to
designate a range of ports.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
port-channel-number-list — Separate non consecutive valid port-channels with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is
used to designate a range of port-channels.
Default Configuration
Disable forward-all on all ports.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example all multicast packets on port g8 are forwarded.
console (config)# interface vlan 2
console (config-if)# bridge multicast forward-all add ethernet g8
5.4.8 bridge multicast forbidden forward-all
The bridge multicast forbidden forward-all interface configuration command forbids a port to be a forward-allmulticast port.
To restore the default, use the no form of the bridge multicast forward-all command.
Syntax
bridge multicast forbidden forward-all {add | remove} {ethernet interface-list | port-channel port-channel-number-list}
no bridge multicast forward-all
ƒ
add — Forbids forwarding all multicast packets.
ƒ
remove — Does not forbid forwarding all multicast packets.
ƒ
interface-list — Separates non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is used to
designate a range of ports.
ƒ
port-channel-number-list — Separates non consecutive valid port-channels with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is
used to designate a range of port-channels.
Default Configuration
By default, this setting is disabled (for example, forwarding to the port is not forbidden).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
IGMP snooping dynamically discovers multicast router ports. When a multicast router port is discovered, all the multicast
packets are forwarded to it unconditionally.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
This command prevents a port to be a multicast router port.
Example
In this example, forwarding all multicast packets to e6 are forbidden.
console (config)# interface vlan 2
console (config-if)# bridge multicast forbidden forward-all add ethernet e6
5.4.9 bridge aging-time
The bridge aging-time global configuration command sets the address table aging time. To restore the default, use the no form
of the bridge aging-time command.
Syntax
bridge aging-time seconds
no bridge aging-time
ƒ
seconds — Time is number of seconds. (Range: 10 - 630 seconds)
Default Configuration
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example the bridge aging time is set to 250.
console (config)# bridge aging-time 250
5.4.10 clear bridge
The clear bridge privileged EXEC command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database.
Syntax
clear bridge
This command has no keywords or arguments.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, the bridge tables are cleared.
console# clear bridge
5.4.11 port security
The port security interface configuration command locks the port. By locking the port, new addresses are not learned on the
port. To enable new address learning, use the no form of the port security command.
Syntax
port security [forward | discard | discard-shutdown] [trap seconds]
no port security
ƒ
forward — Forwards frames with unlearned source addresses, but does not learn the address.
ƒ
discard — Discards frames with unlearned source addresses. This is the default if no option is indicated.
ƒ
discard-shutdown — Discards frames with unlearned source addresses. The port is also shut down.
ƒ
trap Seconds — Sends SNMP traps and defines the minimal amount of time in seconds between two consecutive traps.
(Range: 1 - 1,000,000)
Default Configuration
Disabled - No port security
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, frame forwarding is enabled without learning, and with traps sent every 100 seconds on port e18.
console (config)# interface ethernet e18
console (config-if)# port security forward trap 100
5.4.12 port security routed secure-address
The port security routed secure-address interface configuration command adds MAC-layer secure addresses to a routed
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
port. Use the no form of this command to delete the MAC addresses.
Syntax
port security routed secure-address mac-address
no port security routed secure-address mac-address
ƒ
mac-address — Specify a MAC address.
Default Configuration
No addresses are defined.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, port-channel). Cannot be configured for a range of interfaces (range context).
User Guidelines
The command enables adding secure MAC addresses to a routed ports in port security mode. The command is available when
the port is a routed port and in port security mode. The address is deleted if the port exits the security mode or is not a routed
port.
Example
In this example, the MAC-layer address 66:66:66:66:66:66 is added to port g1.
console (config)# interface ethernet g1
console (config-if)# port security routed secure-address 66:66:66:66:66:66
5.4.13 show bridge address-table
The show bridge address-table privileged EXEC command displays all entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Syntax
show bridge address-table [vlan vlan] [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
vlan — Specific valid VLAN, such as VLAN 1.
ƒ
Interface — A valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database are displayed.
console# show bridge address-table
Aging time is 250 sec
vlan
mac address
port
type
-----
-------------------
------
--------
1
0060.704C.73FF
e8
dynamic
1
0060.708C.73FF
e8
dynamic
200
0010.0D48.37FF
e8
static
5.4.14 show bridge address-table static
The show bridge address-table static privileged EXEC command displays statically created entries in the bridge-forwarding
database.
Syntax
show bridge address-table static [vlan vlan] [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
vlan — Specific valid VLAN, such as VLAN 1.
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, all static entries in the bridge-forwarding database are displayed.
console# show bridge address-table static
Aging time is 300 sec
vlan
mac address
port
type
------
--------------------
------
-------
1
0060.704C.73FF
e8
permanent
1
0060.708C.73FF
e8
delete-on-timeout
200
0010.0D48.37FF
e8
delete-on-reset
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.4.15 show bridge address-table count
The show bridge address-table count privileged EXEC command displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or
at a specific VLAN.
Syntax
show bridge address-table count [vlan vlan]
ƒ
vlan — Specific VLAN.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, the number of addresses present in the VLANs are displayed.
console# show bridge address-table count
Capacity: 8192
Free: 8084
Used: 108
Secure: 0
Dynamic addresses: 97
Static addresses: 2
Internal addresses: 9
vlan
Dynamic
Static
------
--------------
---------
1
75
1
19
22
1
5.4.16 show bridge multicast address-table
The show bridge multicast address-table privileged EXEC command displays multicast MAC address table information.
Syntax
show bridge multicast address-table [vlan vlan-id] [address mac-multicast-address | ip-multicast-address] [format ip | mac]
ƒ
vlan_id — A VLAN ID value.
ƒ
mac-multicast-address — A MAC multicast address.
ƒ
ip- multicast-address — An IP multicast address.
ƒ
format — Multicast address format. Can be ip or mac. If format is unspecified, the default is mac.
-16
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, multicast MAC address table information is displayed.
console # show bridge multicast address-table
Vlan
-----1
19
19
MAC Address
-------------------0100.5e02.0203
0100.5e02.0208
0100.5e02.0208
Type
-------static
static
dynamic
Ports
---------e1, g2
e1-8
e9-11
Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:
Vlan
------1
19
MAC Address
-------------------0100.5e02.0203
0100.5e02.0208
Ports
---------e8
e8
console # show bridge multicast address-table format ip
Vlan
-------1
19
19
IP Address
-----------------224-239.130|2.2.3
224-239.130|2.2.8
224-239.130|2.2.8
Type
-----------static
static
dynamic
Ports
---------e1,g2
e1-8
e9-11
Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:
Vlan
-----1
19
IP Address
--------------224-239.130|2.2.3
224-239.130|2.2.8
Ports
---------e8
e8
5.4.17 show bridge multicast filtering
The show bridge multicast filtering privileged EXEC command displays the multicast filtering configuration.
Syntax
show bridge multicast filtering vlan-id
ƒ
vlan_id — A valid VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, the multicast configuration for VLAN 1 is displayed.
console # show bridge multicast filtering 1
Filtering: Enabled
VLAN: 1
Forward-All
Port
Static
Status
---------
------------
-----------
e1
Forbidden
e2
Forward
Forward(s)
e3
-
Forward(d)
Filter
5.4.18 show ports security
The show ports security privileged EXEC command displays the port-lock status.
Syntax
show ports security [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the port-lock status are displayed.
console# show ports security
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Port
status
Learning
Action
Maximum
Trap
Frequency
------- -------- ------------- ----------------- --------- -------- --------e1
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e2
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e3
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e4
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e5
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e6
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e7
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
e8
Disabled Lock
-
1
-
-
5.5 Clock Commands
5.5.1 clock set
The clock set privileged EXEC command manually sets the system clock.
Syntax
clock set hh:mm:ss day month year
or
clock set hh:mm:ss month day year
ƒ
hh:mm:ss — Current time in hours (military format), minutes, and seconds (0 - 23, mm: 0 - 59, ss: 0 - 59).
ƒ
day — Current day (by date) in the month (1 - 31).
ƒ
month — Current month using the first three letters by name (Jan, …, Dec).
ƒ
year — Current year (2000 - 2097).
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets the system time to 13:32:00 on the 7th March 2005.
console# clock set 13:32:00 7 Mar 2005
5.5.2 clock source
The clock source Privileged EXEC command configures an external time source for the system clock.
Syntax
clock source {sntp}
no clock source
ƒ
sntp — SNTP servers
Default Configuration
No external clock source
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example configures an external time source for the system clock.
console# clock source sntp
5.5.3 clock timezone
The clock timezone global configuration command sets the time zone for display purposes. To set the time to Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), use the no form of this command.
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
clock timezone hours-offset [minutes minutes-offset] [zone acronym ]
no clock timezone
ƒ
hours-offse t— Hours difference from UTC. (Range: -12 – +13)
ƒ
minutes minutes-offse t— Minutes difference from UTC. (Range: 0 – 59
ƒ
zone acronym —The acronym of the time zone. (Range: Up to 4 characters)
Default Configuration
UTC
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The system internally keeps time in UTC, so this command is used only for display purposes and when the time is manually set.
Examples
The following example sets the timezone to 6 hours difference from UTC.
console# (config)# clock timezone -6 zone CST
5.5.4 clock summer-time
The clock summer-time global configuration command configures the system to automatically switch to summer time (daylight
saving time),. To configure the software to not automatically switch to summer time, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
clock summer-time recurring {usa | eu | {week day month hh:mm week day month hh:mm}} [offset offset] [zone acronym ]
clock summer-time date date month year hh:mm date month year hh:mm [offset offset] [zone acronym ]
clock summer-time date month date year hh:mm month date year hh:mm [offset offset] [zone acronym ]
no clock summer-time
ƒ
recurring — Indicates that summer time should start and end on the corresponding specified days every year.
ƒ
date — Indicates that summer time should start on the first specific date listed in the command and end on the second
specific date in the command.
ƒ
usa — The summer time rules are the United States rules.
ƒ
eu — The summer time rules are the European Union rules.
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
week — Week of the month. (Range: 1 - 4, first, last)
ƒ
day — Day of the week (Range: first three letters by name, like sun)
ƒ
date — Date of the month (Range:1 - 31)
ƒ
month — Month (Range: first three letters by name)
ƒ
year — year - no abbreviation (Range: 2000 - 2097)
ƒ
hh:mm — Time in military format, in hours and minutes (Range:hh: 0 - 23, mm:0 - 59)
ƒ
offset offset — Number of minutes to add during summer time (Range: 1 - 1440).
ƒ
zone acronym — The acronym of the time zone to be displayed when summer time is in effect. If unspecified default to
the timezone acronym. (Range: Up to 4 characters)
Default Configuration
Summer time is disabled.
offset offset—default is 60
zone acronym— If unspecified default to the timezone acronym
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
In both the date and recurring forms of the command, the first part of the command specifies when summer time begins, and
the second part specifies when it ends. All times are relative to the local time zone. The start time is relative to standard time.
The end time is relative to summer time. If the starting month is chronologically after the ending month, the system assumes that
you are in the southern hemisphere.
USA rule for daylight saving time:
Start: First Sunday in April
End: Last Sunday in October
Time: 2 am local time
EU rule for daylight saving time:
Start: Last Sunday in March
End: Last Sunday in October
Time: 1.00 am (01:00) Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Examples
The following example sets summer time starting on the first Sunday in April at 2am and finishing on the last Sunday in October
at 2 am.
Console (config)# clock summer-time recurring first sun apr 2:00 last sun oct 2:00
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.5.5 sntp authentication-key
The sntp authentication-key global configuration command defines an authentication key for Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP). To remove the authentication key for SNTP, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp authentication-key number md5 value
no sntp authentication-key number
ƒ
number — Key number (Range: 1 - 4294967295)
ƒ
value — Key value (Range: Up to 8 characters)
Default Configuration
No authentication key is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example defines the authentication key for SNTP.
cnsole(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey
console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
console(config)# sntp authenticate
5.5.6 sntp authenticate
The sntp authenticate global configuration command grants authentication for received Network Time Protocol (NTP) traffic
from servers,. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp authenticate
no sntp authenticate
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
No authentication
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
The command is relevant for both unicast and broadcast.
Examples
The following example defines the authentication key for SNTP and grants authentication.
cnsole(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey
console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
console(config)# sntp authenticate
5.5.7 sntp trusted-key
The sntp trusted-key global configuration command authenticates the identity of a system to which Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP) will synchronize. To disable authentication of the identity of the system, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp trusted-key key-number
no sntp trusted-key key-number
ƒ
key-number — Key number of authentication key to be trusted. (Range: 1 - 4294967295)
Default Configuration
Not trusted.
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
The command is relevant for both unicast and broadcast.
Examples
The following example authenticates key 8.
Console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey
Console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
Console(config)# sntp authenticate
5.5.8 sntp client poll timer
The sntp client poll timer global configuration command sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
client. To return to default, use the no form of this command.
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
sntp client poll timer seconds
no sntp client poll timer
ƒ
seconds — Polling interval in seconds (Range: 60 - 1024)
Default Configuration
1024
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client to 120 seconds.
Console(config)# sntp client poll timer 120
5.5.9 sntp broadcast client enable
The sntp broadcast client enable global configuration command enables the Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP) broadcast clients. To disable the SNTP broadcast clients, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp broadcast client enable
no sntp broadcast client enble
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Disabled
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
The sntp broadcast client enable interface configuration command enables the device to receive broadcast transmissions
globally and on ALL interfaces.
Use the sntp client enable interface configuration command to enable sntp client on specific interface.
Examples
The following example enables the SNTP broadcast clients.
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console (config)#sntp broadcast client enable
5.5.10 sntp anycast client enable
The sntp anycast client enable global configuration command enables anycast client. To disable the polling for SNTP
broadcast client, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp anycast client enable
no sntp anycast client enable
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Disabled
Command Mode
Global configuration
User Guidelines
Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command.
Use the sntp client enable interface configuration command to enable sntp client on specific interface.
Examples
The following example enables anycast clients.
Console (config-if)# sntp anycast client enable
5.5.11 sntp client enable (interface)
The sntp client enable interface configuration command enables the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client on an
interface. To disable the SNTP client, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp client enable
no sntp client enable
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Disabled
-17
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, Port-Channel, VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
Use the sntp client enable global configuration command to enable broadcast clients globally.
Use the sntp anycast client enable global configuration command to enable anycast clients globally.
Examples
The following example enables the SNTP client on the interface.
console (config)# sntp client enable
5.5.12 sntp unicast client enable
The sntp unicast client enable global configuration command enables the device to use the Simple Network
Time Protocol (SNTP) to request and accept Network Time Protocol (NTP) traffic from servers. To disable requesting and
accepting Network Time Protocol (NTP) traffic from servers, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp unicast client enable
no sntp unicast client enable
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example enables the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) to request and accept Network
Time Protocol (NTP) traffic from servers.
console (config)# sntp unicast client enable
5.5.13 sntp unicast client poll
The sntp unicast client poll global configuration command enables polling for the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
predefined unicast clients. To disable the polling for SNTP client, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp unicast client poll
no sntp unicast client poll
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Disabled
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command.
Examples
The following example enables polling for the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) predefined unicast clients.
console (config)# sntp unicast client poll
5.5.14 sntp server
The sntp server global configuration command configures the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) to
request and accept Network Time Protocol (NTP) traffic from a server. To remove a server from the list of NTP servers, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp server ip-address | hostname [poll] [key keyid]
no sntp server host
ƒ
ip-address — IP address of the server. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines
ƒ
hostname — Hostname of the server. (Range: 1 - 160 characters)
ƒ
poll — Enable polling.
ƒ
key keyed — Authentication key to use when sending packets to this peer. (Range:1 – 4294967295)
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
No servers are defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Up to 8 sntp servers can be defined.
Use the sntp unicast client enables global configuration command to enable predefined unicast clients globally.
To enable polling you should also use the sntp unicast client poll global configuration command for global enabling.
Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command.
To define an SNTP server on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ip-address.
Examples
The following example configures the device to accept Network Time Protocol (NTP) traffic from the server on 192.1.1.1
Console (config)# sntp server 192.1.1.1
5.5.15 show clock
The show clock user EXEC command displays the time and date from the system clock.
Syntax
show clock
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the time and date from the system clock.
Console# show clock
15:29:03 Jun 17 2005
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.5.16 show sntp configuration
The show sntp configuration Privileged EXEC command shows the configuration of the Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP), use
Syntax
show sntp configuration
This command has no keywords or arguments.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
Console# show sntp configuration
Polling interval: 7200 seconds.
MD5 Authentication keys: 8, 9
Authentication is required for synchronization.
Trusted Keys: 8,9
Unicast Clients Polling: Enabled.
Server
Polling
Encryption Key
-----------
-----------
----------------------
176.1.1.8
Enabled
9
176.1.8.179
Disabled
Disabled
Broadcast Clients: Enabled
Broadcast Clients Poll: Enabled
Broadcast Interfaces: 1/1, 1/3
OOB SNTP servers
Server
Polling
Encryption Key
-----------
------------
----------------------
10.1.1.91
Enabled
9
Broadcast Clients: Enabled
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Broadcast Clients Poll: Enabled
Broadcast Interfaces: 1/1, 1/3
5.5.17 show sntp status
The show sntp status Privileged EXEC command shows the status of the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP),
Syntax
show sntp status
This command has no keywords or arguments.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example shows the status of the SNTP.
Console# show sntp status
Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference is 176.1.1.8
Reference time is AFE2525E.70597B34 (00:10:22.438 PDT Jul 5 1993)
Unicast servers:
Server
-----------
Preference
-----------------
Status
Last response
[mSec]
[mSec]
-----------
------------
---------------------AFE252C1.6DBDDFF2
7.33
117.79
AFE21789.643287C9
8.98
189.19
Primary
Up
176.1.8.179
Secondary
Unknown
Interface
IP address
Last response
-------------
-----------------
Broadcast:
Primary
Delay
-----------
176.1.1.8
176.1.1.8
Offset
-----------------------AFE252C1.6DBDDFF2
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
176.1.8.179
Secondary
AFE21789.643287C9
5.6 Configuration and Image Files
5.6.1 copy
The copy privileged EXEC command copies files from a source to a destination.
Syntax
copy source-url destination-url [snmp]
ƒ
source-url — The source file location URL or reserved keyword being copied.
ƒ
destination-url — The destination file URL or reserved keyword.
ƒ
snmp — Used only when copying from /to startup-config. Specifies that the destination/source file is inSNMP format.
The following table displays keywords aliases to URL:
Keyword
Source or destination
running-config
Represents the current running configuration file.
startup-config
Represents the startup configuration file.
backup-config
Represents the backup configuration file.
Image
The image is executable code which is decompressed during system startup, into the
switching and routing software that manages the device. There are always two
images stored in the device flash known as "image-1" and "image-2". The images do
not necessarily have to contain the same versions of the software. One of these
images is always marked as active and the other image serves as a back-up. The
"active" image is either the last downloaded image or the image configured as the
"active" image. The switch boot code first tries to load and run the active image.
However, if the active image is found to be corrupt, the boot code tries to load the
back-up image. If the backup image is also corrupt the boot code prompts the user to
initiate the Xmodem
transfer of a valid image through the serial connection. The image file name is in the
format 6024_abcd.dos, where abcd represents the release number.
boot
Boot file. The name of the image is in the format 6024_boot_abcd.rfb, where
abcd represents the release number.
tftp
Source or destination URL for a TFTP network server. The syntax for this alias
is tftp:[[//location]/directory]/filename.
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Xmodem
Source for the file from a serial connection that uses the Xmodem protocol.
null
Null destination for copies or files. A remote file can be copied to null to determine its
size.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The location of a file system dictates the format of the source or destination URL.
The startup-config and the backup-config files cannot be copied to the running-config file.
The entire copying process may take several minutes and differs from protocol to protocol and from network to network.
Filenames cannot be a substring of "startup-config" or "running-config". e.g. the following filenames are not allowed: "s", "st",
"sta".
File download from a TFTP server may take a long time, and therefore fail, if there are many Quality of Service elements (ACLs,
policers, etc.) present. In this case, it is recommended to copy the TFTP file to the backup configuration file, and then copy the
backup file to the running / startup configuration file.
When using tftp to copy files, it is recommended to set the tftp server timeout to 10-20 second.
The device does not accept new commands while files are being copied; however, the user does not receive notification that the
device is busy copying, and will “ignore” the command. Note that this behavior occurs only at the session, which initiated the
copy command; response to activity on other management sessions will result in a delay, but will not be ignored.
When a file is copied to the running configuration file or to the startup configuration file, the data in the file is checked. If the
check fails, the file is not downloaded, and the user is notified of the error. However, the user should use caution when copying a
file from a TFTP server to the backup configuration file, because there is no check of data.An attempt to display the corrupted
backup configuration file (show backup) will result in information which is meaningless to the user (or even a blank row).
The device does not accept new commands while files are being copied; however, the user does not receive notification that the
device is busy copying, and will “ignore” the command. Note that this behavior occurs only at the session, which initiated the
copy command; response to activity on other management sessions will result in a delay, but will not be ignored.
Understanding Invalid Combinations of Source and Destination
Some invalid combinations of source and destination exist. Specifically, the following cannot be copied:
If the source file and destination file are the same file.
xmodem cannot be a destination. Can only be copied to image, boot and null.
tftp cannot be the source and destination on the same copy.
Copy Character Descriptions:
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Character
Description
!
For network transfers, an exclamation point indicates that the copy process is taking place.
Each exclamation point indicates the successful transfer of ten packets (512 bytes each).
.
For network transfers, a period indicates that the copy process timed out. Many periods in a
row typically mean that the copy process may fail.
Copying image file from a Server to Flash Memory
Use the copy source-url image command to copy an image file from a server to Flash memory.
Copying boot file from a Server to Flash Memory
Use the copy source-url boot command to copy a boot file from a server to Flash memory.
Copying a Configuration File from a Server to the Running Configuration
Use the copy source-url running-config command to load a "configuration file" from a network server to the device "running
configuration". The configuration is added to the "running configuration" as if the commands were typed in the command-line
interface (CLI). The resulting configuration file is a combination of the previous "running configuration" and the loaded
"configuration file", with the loaded "configuration file" having precedence.
Copying a Configuration File from a Server to the Startup Configuration
Use the copy source-url startup-config command to copy a "configuration file" from a network server to the device "startup
configuration". These commands replace the startup configuration file with the copied configuration file.
Storing the Running or Startup Configuration on a Server
Use the copy running-config destination-url command to copy the current configuration file to a network server using TFTP.
Use the copy startup-config destination-url command to copy the "startup configuration" file to a network server.
The configuration file copy can serve as a backup copy.
Saving the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration
Use the copy running-config startup-config command to copy the "running configuration" to the "startup configuration".
Backup the Running Configuration or Startup Configuration to the Backup Configuration
Use the copy running-config file command to backup the running configuration to a backup configuration file.
Use the copy startup-config file command to backup the startup configuration a backup configuration file Specifying
out-of-band addresses
If you want to copy from/to a server on the out-of-band port use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ipaddress.
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
The following example copies a system image named file1 from the TFTP server with an IP address of 172.16.101.101 to non
active image file.
Console# copy tftp://172.16.101.101/file1 image
Accessing file 'file1' on 172.16.101.101...
Loading file1 from 172.16.101.101:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!! [OK]
Copy took 0:01:11 [hh:mm:ss]
Accessing file 'configfile' on oob/172.16.1.1...
Loading file1 from oob/172.16.1.1:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!! [OK]
Copy took 0:0:23 [hh:mm:ss]
5.6.2 show startup-config
The show startup-config privileged EXEC command displays the startup configuration file contents.
Syntax
show startup-config
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays the contents of the startup-config file.
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console# show startup-config
software version 1.1
hostname device
interface ethernet 1/1
ip address 176.242.100.100 255.255.255.0
duplex full
speed 1000
interface ethernet 1/2
ip address 176.243.100.100 255.255.255.0
duplex full
speed 1000
-18
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.7 Ethernet Configuration Commands
5.7.1 interface ethernet
The interface ethernet global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure an Ethernet type
interface.
Syntax
interface ethernet interface
ƒ
interface — Valid Ethernet port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables ports g1 for configuration.
Console(config)# interface ethernet g1
Console(config-if)#
5.7.2 interface range ethernet
The interface range ethernet global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple
Ethernet type interfaces.
Syntax
interface range ethernet {port-range | all}
ƒ
port-range—List of valid ports to add. Separate non consecutive ports with a comma and no spaces; a hyphen is used
to designate a range of ports.
ƒ
all—All Ethernet ports.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each active interface in the range. If the command
returns an error on one of the active interfaces, it does not stop executing commands on other active interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how ports e1 to e4 and ports g1 to g2 are grouped to receive the same command.
Console(config)# interface range ethernet e1 – e4, g1 - g2
Console(config-if)#
5.7.3 shutdown
The shutdown interface configuration command disables interfaces. To restart a disabled interface, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
shutdown
no shutdown
Default Configuration
The interface is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel, out-of-band Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example disables Ethernet e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# shutdown
The following example re-enables Ethernet port e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# no shutdown
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.7.4 description
The description interface configuration command adds a description to an interface. To remove the description use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
description string
no description
ƒ
string—Comment or a description of the port up to 64 characters.
Default Configuration
By default, the interface does not have a description.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel, out-of-band Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example adds a description to the Ethernet e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# description RD_SW#3
5.7.5 speed
The speed interface configuration command configures the speed of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto-negotiation.
To restore the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
speed {10 | 100 | 1000}
no speed
ƒ
10—Configures the port to 10 Mbps.
ƒ
100—Configures the port to 100 Mbps.
ƒ
1000—Configures the port to 1000 Mbps.
Default Configuration
Maximum port capability.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel, out-of-band Ethernet) mode
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
The command "no speed" in port-channel context returns each port in the port-channel to its maximum capability.
Before attempting to force a particular duplex mode the port operating at 10/100 Mbps, disable the auto-negotiation on that port.
Example
The following example configures the speed operation of Ethernet e5 to force 100-Mbps operation.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# speed 100
5.7.6 duplex
The duplex interface configuration command configures the full/half duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface when not
using auto-negotiation. To restore the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
duplex {half | full}
no duplex
ƒ
half—Force half-duplex operation
ƒ
full—Force full-duplex operation
Default Configuration
The interface is set to full duplex.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, out-of-band Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Before attempting to force a particular duplex mode on the port operating at 10/100 Mbps, disable the auto-negotiation on that
port.
Half duplex mode can be set only for ports operating at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Example
The following example configures the duplex operation of Ethernet e5 to force full duplex operation.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# duplex full
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.7.7 negotiation
The negotiation interface configuration command enables auto-negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a
given interface. To disable negotiation, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
negotiation
no negotiation
Default Configuration
auto-negotiation
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel, out-of-band Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Turning off auto-negotiation on an aggregate link may, under some circumstances, make it non-operational. If the other side has
auto-negotiation turned on, it may re-synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half-duplex operation, and may, as per
the standards, set them all inactive.
Example
The following example enables autonegotiation on Ethernet e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# negotiation
5.7.8 flowcontrol
The flowcontrol interface configuration command configures the Flow Control on a given interface. To restore the default, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
flowcontrol {auto | on | off | rx | tx}
no flowcontrol
ƒ
auto—Enables auto-negotiation of Flow Control.
ƒ
on—Enables Flow Control.
ƒ
off—Disables Flow Control.
ƒ
rx—Enables receiving pause frames only.
ƒ
tx—Enables transmitting pause frames only
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
Flow Control is off.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
Flow Control will operate only if duplex mode is set to FULL. Back Pressure will operate only if duplex mode is set to HALF.
When Flow Control is ON, the head-of-line-blocking mechanism of this port is disabled.
If a link is set to NOT use auto-negotiation, the other side of the link must also be configured to not use auto-negotiation.
To select auto, ensure negotiation for Flow Control is enabled.
Example
In the following example, Flow Control is enabled on e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# flowcontrol on
5.7.9 mdix
The mdix interface configuration command enables automatic crossover on a given interface. To disable automatic crossover,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
mdix {on | auto}
no mdix
ƒ
on—Manual mdix
ƒ
auto—Auto mdi/mdix
Default Configuration
Automatic crossover is enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Mdix Auto : All possibilities to connect a PC with cross OR normal cables are supported and are automatically detected.
Mdix ON: It is possible to connect to a PC only with a normal cable and to connect to another switch ONLY with a cross cable.
If MDIX is set to "no mdix", the device works oppostie from the "MDIX On" behavior. It is possible to connect to PC only with
cross cable, and to connect to another switch ONLY with Normal cable
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
In the following example, automatic crossover is enabled on g2.
Console(config)# interface ethernet g2
Console(config-if)# mdix auto
5.7.10 back-pressure
The back-pressure interface configuration command enables Back Pressure on a given interface. To disable Back Pressure,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
back-pressure
no back-pressure
Default Configuration
Back Pressure is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
Back Pressure will operate only if duplex mode is set to half.
Example
In the following example Back Pressure is enabled on e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# back-pressure
5.7.11 port jumbo-frame
The port jumbo-frame global configuration command enables jumbo frames for the device. To disable jumbo frames, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
port jumbo-frame
no port jumbo-frame
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
Jumbo Frames are not enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In the following example, Jumbo Frames are enabled on the device.
Console# port jumbo-frame
5.7.12 clear counters
The clear counters user EXEC mode command clears statistics on an interface.
Syntax
clear counters [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
Interface — Valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In the following example, the counters for interface g1 are cleared.
console# clear counters ethernet g1
5.7.13 set interface active
The set interface active privileged EXEC mode command reactivates an interface that was suspended by the system.
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
set interface active {ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number}
ƒ
interface — Valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privilege EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example activates interface e5, which is disabled.
console# set interface active ethernet e5
5.7.14 show interfaces configuration
The show interfaces configuration Privilege EXEC mode command displays the configuration for all configured interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces configuration [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number | ]
ƒ
Interface — Valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel trunk index.
ƒ
oob-interface — Out-of-band Ethernet port number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Privilege EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the configuration for all configured interfaces:
console# show interfaces configuration
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Port
-------e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
e8
g1
g2
Type
Duplex Speed Neg
---------------------------100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
100M-Copper Full
100
Enabled
1G-Combo-C Full
1000 Enabled
1G-Combo-C Full
1000 Enabled
Ch
-------ch1
ch2
ch3
ch4
ch5
ch6
ch7
ch8
Type
---------------
Speed Neg
----- --------Enabled
-Enabled
-Enabled
-Enabled
-Enabled
-Enabled
-Enabled
-Enabled
Flow
control
------Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Flow
Admin
control State
----------Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Off
Up
Back
Mdix
Pressure Mode
-------- ---Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Disabled Auto
Admin
State
----Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
The displayed port configuration information includes the following:
ƒ
Port—The port number.
ƒ
Port Type—The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier. For example 1000Base-T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband
signaling inluding both Tx and Rx transmissions.
ƒ
Duplex—Displays the port Duplex status.
ƒ
Speed—Refers to the port speed.
ƒ
Neg—Describes the Auto-negotiation status.
ƒ
Flow Control—Displays the Flow Control status.
ƒ
Back Pressure—Displays the Back Pressure status.
ƒ
MDIX Mode—Displays the Auto-crossover status.
ƒ
Admin State—Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled.
5.7.15 show interfaces status
The show interfaces status user EXEC command displays the status for all configured interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces status [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number | out-of-band-eth oob-interface]
ƒ
Interface — A valid Ethernet port.
-19
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel trunk index.
ƒ
oob-interface — Out of band Ethernet port number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privilege EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the status for all configured interfaces.
Console# show interfaces status
Port
----e1
e1
e2
Type
Duplex
-------- -----------100
Full
100
Full
100
Full
Ch
Type
------1
-------1000
Duplex
----------Full
Speed
----------100
100
100
Neg
-----------Auto
Off
Off
Speed
----------1000
Neg
--------Off
Flow
Link
Control
State
----------- ---------On
Up
Off
Down
Off
Up
Flow
Control
------------Off
Back
Mdix
Pressure
Mode
---------------------Enable
On
Disable
Off
Disable
On
Back
Pressure
-------------Disable
Link
State
--------Up
The displayed port status information includes the following:
ƒ
Port—The port number.
ƒ
Description—If the port has a description, the description is displayed.
ƒ
Port Type—The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier. For example, 1000Base-T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband
signaling inluding both Tx and Rx transmissions.
ƒ
Duplex—Displays the port Duplex status.
ƒ
Speed—Refers to the port speed.
ƒ
Neg—Describes the Auto-negotiation status.
ƒ
Flow Control—Displays the Flow Control status.
ƒ
Back Pressure—Displays the Back Pressure status.
ƒ
Link State—Displays the Link Aggregation status.
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.7.16 show interfaces description
The show interfaces description user EXEC command displays the description for all configured interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces description [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number| out-of-band--eth oobinterface]
ƒ
Interface — Valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel trunk index.
ƒ
oob-interface — Out-of-band Ethernet port number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Privilege EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the description for the interface g1.
Console# show interfaces description ethernet g1
Port
Description
------
--------------------
e1
Management_port
e2
R&D_port
e3
Finance_port
Ch
Description
-----
------------------
1
Output
5.7.17 show interfaces counters
The show interfaces counters user EXEC command displays traffic seen by the physical interface.
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
show interfaces counters [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Privilege EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays traffic seen by the physical interface:
Console# show interfaces counters
Port
InOctets
InUcastPkts
-------
-------------
---------------
InMcastPkts
----------------
InBcastPkts
-----------------
e1
183892
1289
987
8
e2
0
0
0
0
e3
123899
1788
373
19
Port
OutOctets
OutUcastPkts
OutMcastPkts
OutBcastPkts
-------
-------------
-------------------
-------------------
------------------
e4
9188
9
8
0
e5
0
0
0
0
e6
8789
27
8
0
Ch
---1
Ch
---1
InOctets
InUcastPkts
------------ ---------------27889
OutOctets
------------23739
InMcastPkts
----------------
InBcastPkts
-----------------
928
0
78
OutUcastPkts
OutMcastPkts
OutBcastPkts
--------------------
------------------
-------------------
882
0
-20
122
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The following example displays counters for port g1.
Console# show interfaces counters ethernet g1
Port
------
OutOctets
-------------
g1
183892
Port
OutOctets
------
-------------
g1
OutUcastPkts
OutMcastPkts
OutBcastPkts
-------------------
-------------------
------------------
1289
987
8
OutUcastPkts
OutMcastPkts
OutBcastPkts
-------------------
-------------------
------------------
9188
9
8
0
FCS Errors: 8
Single Collision Frames: 0
Multiple Collision Frames: 0
SQE Test Errors: 0
Deferred Transmissions: 0
Late Collisions: 0
Excessive Collisions: 0
Internal MAC Tx Errors: 0
Carrier Sense Errors: 0
Oversize Packets: 0
Internal MAC Rx Errors: 0
Received Pause Frames: 0
Transmitted Pause Frames: 0
The following table describes the fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
InOctets
Counted received octets.
InUcastPkts
Counted received unicast packets.
InMcastPkts
Counted received multicast packets.
InBcastPkts
Counted received broadcast packets.
OutOctets
Counted transmitted octets.
OutUcastPkts
Counted transmitted unicast packets.
OutMcastPkts
Counted transmitted multicast packets.
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
OutBcastPkts
Counted transmitted broadcast packets.
FCS Errors
Counted frames received that are an integral number of octets in length but do
not pass the FCS check.
Single Collision
Frames
Counted frames that are involved in a single collision, and are subsequently
transmitted successfully.
Late Collisions
Counted times that a collision is detected later than one slotTime into the
transmission of a packet.
Excessive Collisions
Counted frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions.
Internal MAC Tx Errors
Counted frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer
transmit error.
Oversize Packets
Counted frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
Internal MAC Rx Errors
Counted frames for which reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer
receive error.
Received Pause
Frames
Counted MAC Control frames received with an opcode indicating the PAUSE
operation.
Transmitted Pause
Frames
Counted MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode
indicating the PAUSE operation.
5.7.18 show ports jumbo-frame
The show ports jumbo-frame user EXEC command displays the jumbo frames configuration.
Syntax
show ports jumbo-frame
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the jumbo frames configuration.
Console# show ports jumbo-frame
Jumbo frames are disabled
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Jumbo frames will be enabled after reset
5.7.19 port storm-control broadcast enable
The port storm-control broadcast enable interface configuration command enables broadcast storm control. To disable
broadcast storm control, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
port storm-control broadcast enable
no port storm-control broadcast enable
Default Configuration
Broadcast storm control is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Use the port storm-control broadcast rate interface configuration command, to set the maximum allowable broadcast rate.
Multicast can be counted as part of the "storm" frames if the port storm-control include-multicast global configuration
command is already executed.
Example
The following example enables broadcast storm control on port e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# port storm-control broadcast enable
5.7.20 port storm-control broadcast rate
The port storm-control broadcast rate interface configuration command configures the maximum broadcast rate. Use the no
form of this command to configure the default value.
port storm-control broadcast rate rate
no port storm-control broadcast rate
ƒ
rate—Maximum of kilobytes per second of broadcast and multicast traffic on a port. (Rate: 70 - 100000)
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
The default storm control broadcast rate is 12000.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
User Guidelines
Use the port storm-control broadcast enable interface configuration command to enable broadcast storm control.
The rate is rounded to the nearest 64 kbytes/sec (except 1 - 63 kbytes/sec, which is rounded to 64 bytes/sec).
Note that if the rate is 0, broadcast packets are not forwarded.
Example
The following example configures the maximum broadcast rate 100 kilobytes per second.
console(config)# interface ethernet g2
console(config-if)# port storm-control broadcast rate 100
5.7.21 show ports storm-control
The show ports storm-control privileged EXEC command displays the storm control configuration.
Syntax
show ports storm-control [ethernet interface]
ƒ
ethernet interface—A valid Ethernet port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the storm control configuration.
Console# show ports storm-control
Port
Broadcast Storm control [kbyes/sec]
-----
-------------------------------------------------
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
e1
8000
e2
Disabled
e3
Disabled
5.8 GVRP Commands
5.8.1 gvrp enable (global)
GVRP, or GARP VLAN Registration Protocol, is an industry-standard protocol designed to propagate VLAN information from
device to device. With GVRP, a single switch is manually configured with all desired VLANs for the network, and all other
switches on the network learn these VLANs dynamically.
The gvrp enable global configuration command enables GVRP globally. To disable GVRP globally on the switch, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
gvrp enable
no gvrp enable
Default Configuration
GVRP is globally disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example globally enables GVRP on the device.
Console (config)# gvrp enable
5.8.2 gvrp enable (interface)
The gvrp enable interface configuration command enables GVRP on an interface. To disable GVRP on an interface, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
gvrp enable
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
no gvrp enable
Default Configuration
GVRP is disabled on all interfaces by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
An access port would not dynamically join a VLAN because it is always a member in only one VLAN.
Example
The following example enables GVRP on ethernet g8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# gvrp enable
5.8.3 garp timer
The garp timer interface configuration command adjusts the GARP application join, leave, and leaveall GARP timer values. To
reset the timer to default values, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value
no garp timer
ƒ
join — Indicates the time in milliseconds that PDUs are transmitted. (Range: 10-2147483640)
ƒ
leave — Indicates the amount of time in milliseconds that the device waits before leaving its GARP state. The Leave
Time is activated by a Leave All Time message sent/received, and cancelled by the Join message. (Range:
10-2147483640)
ƒ
leaveall — Used to confirm the port within the VLAN. The time in milliseconds between messages sent. (Range:
10-2147483640)
ƒ
timer_value — Timer values in milliseconds.
Default Configuration
The default timer values are as follows:
Join timer — 200 milliseconds
Leave timer — 600 milliseconds
Leavall timer — 10000 milliseconds
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
The following relationship for the various timer values must be maintained:
Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time.
Leaveall time must be greater than the leave time.
Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2-connected devices. If the GARP timers are set differently on Layer 2-connected
devices, GARP application will not operate successfully.
As the number of dynamic VLANs (GVRP) increases, the leave time should be increased from the default value.
For example, if the number of dynamic VLANs is 400, it is recommended to increase the leave time.
Example
The following example sets the leave timer for port e8 to 900 milliseconds.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# garp timer leave 900
5.8.4 gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
The gvrp vlan-creation-forbid interface configuration command enables or disables dynamic VLAN creation. To disable
dynamic VLAN creation, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
no gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
Default Configuration
By default, dynamic VLAN creation is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
This command forbids dynamic VLAN creation from the interface. The creation or modification of dynamic VLAN registration
entries as a result of the GVRP exchanges on an interface are restricted only to those VLANs for which static VLAN registration
exists.
Example
The following example disables dynamic VLAN creation on port e8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
-20
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.8.5 gvrp registration-forbid
The gvrp registration-forbid interface configuration command de-registers all dynamic VLANs, and prevents dynamic VLAN
registration on the port. To allow dynamic registering for VLANs on a port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
gvrp registration-forbid
no gvrp registration-forbid
Default Configuration
Dynamic registering and deregistering for each VLAN on the port is allowed.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how default dynamic registering and deregistering is forbidden for each VLAN on port e8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# gvrp registration-forbid
5.8.7 clear gvrp statistics
The clear gvrp statistics privileged EXEC command clears all the GVRP statistics information.
Syntax
clear gvrp statistics [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
• interface — A valid Ethernet interface.
• port-channel-number — A valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example clears all the GVRP statistics information on port e8.
Console# clear gvrp statistics ethernet e8
5.8.8 show gvrp configuration
The show gvrp configuration User EXEC command displays GVRP configuration information, including timer values, whether
GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation is enabled, and which ports are running GVRP.
Syntax
show gvrp configuration [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet interface.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to display GVRP configuration information:
Console# show gvrp configuration
GVRP Feature is currently enabled on the switch.
Maximum VLANs: 255,
Port(s)
GVRP
Registration
Status
Dynamic
VLAN
Timers
(milliseconds)
Creation
--------
-------------
----------------
e1
Enabled
Normal
e4
Enabled
Normal
---------------
Leave
Leave
All
Join
--------------------- ---------------- -------------
Enabled
Enabled
-21
200
600
10000
200
600
10000
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.8.9 show gvrp statistics
The show gvrp statistics User EXEC command displays GVRP statistics.
Syntax
show gvrp statistics [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet interface.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows GVRP statistics information:
Console# show gvrp statistics
GVRP statistics:
----------------------rJE : Join Empty Received
rJIn : Join In Received
rEmp : Empty Received
rLIn : Leave In Received
rLE : Leave Empty Received
rLA : Leave All Received
sJE : Join Empty Sent
sJIn : Join In Sent
sEmp : Empty Sent
sLIn : Leave In Sent
sLE : Leave Empty Sent
sLA : Leave All Sent
Port
rJE
rJIn
rEmp
rLIn
------
------ ------
e1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-------- --------
rLE
rLA
------ -------
sJE
------
sJIn
sEmp
-------- ---------
-21
sLIn
-----
sLE
sLA
-------- ------
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
e7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5.8.10 show gvrp error-statistics
The show gvrp error-statistics user EXEC command displays GVRP error statistics.
Syntax
show gvrp error-statistics [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — Valid Ethernet interface.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays GVRP statistics information.
Console# show gvrp-error statistics
GVRP error statistics:
----------------------------Legend:
INVPROT : Invalid Protocol Id
INVPLEN : Invalid PDU Length
INVATYP : Invalid Attribute Type
INVALEN : Invalid Attribute Length
INVAVAL : Invalid Attribute Value
INVEVENT : Invalid Event
Port
INVPROT
INVATYP
INVAVAL
------
-------------
-------------
-------------
INVALEN
--------------
INVEVENT
---------------
e1
0
0
0
0
0
e2
0
0
0
0
0
e3
0
0
0
0
0
e4
0
0
0
0
0
e5
0
0
0
0
0
e6
0
0
0
0
0
e7
0
0
0
0
0
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
e8
0
0
0
0
0
5.9 IGMP Snooping Commands
5.9.1 ip igmp snooping (Global)
The ip igmp snooping global configuration command enables Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping. To
disable IGMP snooping use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Default Configuration
IGMP snooping is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping.
Console (config)# ip igmp snooping
5.9.2 ip igmp snooping (Interface)
The ip igmp snooping interface configuration command enables Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on a
specific VLAN. To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Default Configuration
IGMP snooping is disabled on all VLANs in the set context.
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Interface configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
IGMP snooping can only be enabled on static VLANs.
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping on VLAN 2.
Console (config)# interface vlan 2
Console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping
5.9.3 ip igmp snooping mrouter
The ip igmp snooping mrouter interface configuration command enables automatic learning of multicast router ports in the
context of a specific VLAN. To remove automatic learning of multicast router ports, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping mrouter learn-pim-dvmrp
no ip igmp snooping mrouter learn-pim-dvmrp
Default Configuration
Automatic learning of mrouter ports is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
Multicast router ports can be configured statically by the bridge multicast forward-all command.
Example
The following example enables automatic learning of multicast router ports on VLANs.
Console (config) # interface vlan 2
Console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping mrouter learn-pim-dvmrp
5.9.4 ip igmp snooping host-time-out
The ip igmp snooping host-time-out interface configuration command configures the host-time-out. If an IGMP report for a
multicast group was not received for a host-time-out period, from a specific port, this port is deleted from the member list of that
multicast group. To reset to default host-time-out use the no form of this command.
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
ip igmp snooping host-time-out time-out
no ip igmp snooping host-time-out
Default Configuration
The default host-time-out is 260 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
The timeout should be at least greater than 2*query_interval+max_response_time of the IGMP router.
Example
The following example configures the host timeout to 300 seconds.
Console (config)# interface vlan 2
Console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping host-time-out 300
5.9.5 ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out
The ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out interface configuration command configures the mrouter-time-out. The
mrouter-time-out command is used for setting the aging-out time after multicast router ports are automatically learned. To
configure the default mrouter-time-out, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out time-out
no ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out
ƒ
time-out—mrouter timeout in seconds (Range: 1 - 2147483647)
Default Configuration
The default value is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the mrouter timeout to 200 seconds.
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console (config)# interface vlan 2
Console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out 200
5.9.6 ip igmp snooping leave-time-out
The ip igmp snooping leave-time-out command configures the leave-time-out. If an IGMP report for a multicast group is not
received within the leave-time-out period after an IGMP leave was received from a specific port, the current port is deleted from
the member list of that multicast group. To configure the default leave-time-out, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping leave-time-out {time-out | immediate-leave}
no ip igmp snooping leave-time-out
ƒ
time-out — leave-time-out in seconds. (Range: 0 - 2147483647)
ƒ
immediate-leave — Specifies that the port should be immediately removed from the members list after receivingIGMP
Leave.
Default Configuration
The default leave-time-out configuration is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
The leave timeout should be set greater than the maximum time that a host is allowed to respond to an IGMP Query.
Use immediate leave only where there is only one host connected to a port.
Example
The following example configures the host leave-time-out to 60 seconds.
Console (config)# interface vlan 2
Console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping leave-time-out 60
5.9.7 show ip igmp snooping mrouter
The show ip igmp snooping mrouter User EXEC command displays information on dynamically learned multicast router
interfaces.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [interface vlan-id]
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
vlan_id — VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows IGMP snooping mrouter information.
Console # show ip igmp snooping mrouter
VLAN
Ports
---------
-----------
2
e1
5.9.8 show ip igmp snooping interface
The show ip igmp snooping interface User EXEC command displays IGMP snooping configuration.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping interface vlan-id
ƒ
vlan_id — VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The example displays IGMP snooping information.
Console # show ip igmp snooping interface 1
IGMP Snooping is globaly disabled
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
IGMP Snooping is disabled on VLAN 1
IGMP host timeout is 260 sec
IGMP Immediate leave is disabled. IGMP leave timeout is 60 sec
IGMP mrouter timeout is 300 sec
Automatic learning of multicast router ports is enabled
5.9.9 show ip igmp snooping groups
The show ip igmp snooping groups user EXEC command displays the multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping groups [vlan vlan-id] [address ip-multicast-address]
ƒ
vlan_id — VLAN ID value.
ƒ
ip-multicast-address — IP multicast address.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
To see the full multicast address table (including static addresses) use the show bridge address-table command.
Example
The example shows IGMP snooping information.
Console # show ip igmp snooping groups
Vlan
IP Address
Querier
Ports
-------
-------------------------------------
-------------
------------
1
224-239.130|2.2.3
Yes
e1, g2
19
224-239.130|2.2.8
Yes
e5-8
-21
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.10 IP Addressing Commands
5.10.1 ip address
The ip address interface configuration command sets an IP address. To remove an IP address, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
ip address ip-address {mask | prefix-length}
no ip address [ip-address]
ƒ
ip-address — IP address
ƒ
mask — The IP address network mask. The IP address network mask 255.0.0.0 (prefix length 8) to 255.255.255.252
(prefix length 30)
ƒ
prefix-length — The number of bits that comprise the IP address prefix. The prefix length must be preceded by a forward
slash (/). (Range: 8 -30)
Default Configuration
No IP address is defined for interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, VLAN, port-channel, out-of-band Ethernet)
User Guidelines
An IP address cannot be configured for a range of interfaces (range context).
Example
The following example configures VLAN 1 with the IP address 131.108.1.27 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
Console (config)# interface vlan 1
Console (config-if)# ip address 131.108.1.27 255.255.255.0
5.10.2 ip address dhcp
The ip address dhcp interface configuration command acquires an IP address on an interface from the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. To deconfigure any acquired address, use the no form of this command.
The no ip address dhcp command deconfigures any IP address that was acquired, thus sending a DHCPRELEASE message.
Syntax
ip address dhcp [hostname host-name]
no ip address dhcp
ƒ
hostname — Specifies the host name.
ƒ
host-name — DHCP host name. This name need not be the same as the host name entered in global configuration
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
mode.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, VLAN, port-channel, out-of-band Ethernet)
User Guidelines
The ip address dhcp command allows any interface to dynamically learn its IP address by using the DHCP protocol.
Some DHCP Servers require that the DHCPDISCOVER message have a specific host name. The most typical usage of the ip
address dhcp hostname host-name command is when host-name is the host name provided by the system administrator.
If a router is configured to obtain its IP address from a DHCP server, it sends a DHCPDISCOVER message to provide
information about itself to the DHCP server on the network.
If the ip address dhcp command is used with or without the optional keyword, the DHCP option 12 field (host name option) is
included in the DISCOVER message. By default, the specified DHCP host name is the device globally configured host name.
When the device is reset, the DHCP command is saved in the configuration file, but the IP address is not. It is recommended not
to define a DHCP address on an inband port or LAG. If a DHCP IP address is configured, this address is dynamically retrieved,
and the "ip address dhcp" command is saved in the configuration file. In the event of a master failure, the backup will again
attempt to retrieve a DHCP address. This could result in one of the following:
ƒ
The same IP address may be assigned;
ƒ
A different IP address may be assigned, which could result in loss of connectivity to the management station;
ƒ
The DHCP server may be down, which would result in IP address retrieval failure, and possible loss of connectivity to the
management station.
Example
The following example acquires an IP address from DHCP.
Console (config)# interface vlan 1
Console (config-if)# ip address dhcp
5.10.3 ip default-gateway
The ip default-gateway command defines a default gateway (router). To remove the default gateway use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
ip default-gateway ip-address
no ip default-gateway
ƒ
ip-address — Valid IP address that specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
No default gateway is defined.
Command Mode
Interface configuration
User Guidelines
The setting of the default gateway on the out-of-band port must not precede the assignment of the IP address.
Always assign the IP address to the out-of-band port first, and then set the default gateway.
Example
The following example defines an ip default gateway.
Console(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.1.1
5.10.4 show ip interface
The show ip interface user EXEC command displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IP.
Syntax
show ip interface [ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number]]
ƒ
ethernet interface-number — Ethernet port number.
ƒ
vlan vlan-id — VLAN number.
ƒ
port-channel number — Port-channel number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays VLAN 1 configuration.
Console# show ip interface vlan 1
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.10.5 arp
The arp global configuration command adds a permanent entry in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
To remove an entry from the ARP cache, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
arp ip_addr hw_addr {ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number | }
no arp ip_addr hw_addr {ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number | }
ƒ
ip_addr — IP address or IP alias to map to the specified MAC address.
ƒ
hw_addr — MAC address to map to the specified IP address or IP alias.
ƒ
ethernet interface-number — Ethernet port number.
ƒ
vlan vlan-id — VLAN number.
ƒ
port-channel number — Port-channel number.
Default Configuration
By default, ARP is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The software uses ARP cache entries to translate 32-bit IP addresses into 48-bit hardware addresses. Because most hosts
support dynamic resolution, static ARP cache entries do not need to be specified.
Example
The following example adds the IP address 198.133.219.232 and MAC address 00-00-0c-40-0f-bc to the ARP table.
Console (config)# arp 198.133.219.232 0000.0c40.0fbc ethernet e8
5.10.6 arp timeout
The arp timeout global configuration command configures how long an entry remains in the ARP cache. To restore the default
value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
arp timeout seconds
no arp timeout seconds
ƒ
seconds — Time (in seconds) that an entry remains in the ARP cache. (Range: 1 - 40000000)
Default Configuration
The default timeout is 60000 seconds.
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
It Is recommended not to set the timeout value to less than 3600.
Note:
The ARP entry is deleted between the period of the "timeout value" and twice the "timeout value". For example, if the timeout
value is 20 seconds, the ARP value is deleted during the period of 20 to 40 seconds.
Example
The following example configures ARP timeout to 12000 seconds.
Console (config)# arp timeout 12000
5.10.7 clear arp-cache
The clear arp-cache privileged EXEC command deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache.
Syntax
clear arp-cache
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache.
Console# clear arp-cache
5.10.8 show arp
The show arp privileged EXEC command displays entries in the ARP table.
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
show arp
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays entries in the ARP table.
Console# show arp
ARP timeout: 60000 Seconds
Interface
IP address
HW address
------------
------------------------
------------------
status
--------
e1
10.7.1.102
00:10:B5:04:DB:4B
Dynamic
g2
10.7.1.135
00:50:22:00:2A:A4
Static
5.11 LACP Commands
5.11.1 lacp system-priority
The lacp system-priority global configuration command configures the system priority. To reset to default, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
lacp system-priority value
no lacp system-priority
ƒ
value — Value of the priority. (Range: 1 - 65535)
Default Configuration
The default system priority value is 1.
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the system priority to 120.
Console (config)# lacp system-priority 120
5.11.2 lacp port-priority
The lacp port-priority interface configuration command configures the priority value for physical ports. To reset to default
priority value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
lacp port-priority value
no lacp port-priority
ƒ
value — Port priority value. (Range: 1 - 65535)
Default Configuration
The default port priority value is 1.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the priority value for port e8 to 247.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# lacp port-priority 247
5.11.3 lacp timeout
The lacp timeout interface configuration command assigns an administrative LACP timeout. To reset the default administrative
LACP timeout use the no form of this command.
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
lacp timeout {long | short}
no lacp timeout
ƒ
long — Specifies a long timeout value.
ƒ
Short — Specifies a short timeout value.
Default Configuration
The default port timeout value is long.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example assigns an administrative LACP timeout for port e8 to a long timeout value.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# lacp timeout long
5.11.4 show lacp ethernet
The show lacp ethernet privilege EXEC command displays LACP information for Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show lacp ethernet interface [parameters | statistics | protocol-state]
ƒ
Interface — Ethernet interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privilege EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to display LACP statistics information.
Console# show lacp ethernet e1 statistics
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Port e1 LACP Statistics:
LACP PDUs sent:2
LACP PDUs received:2
5.11.5 show lacp port-channel
The show lacp port-channel privileged EXEC command displays LACP information for a port-channel.
Syntax
show lacp port-channel [port_channel_number]
ƒ
port_channel_number — The port-channel number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to display LACP port-channel information.
Console# show lacp port-channel 1
Port-Channel 1:Port Type 1000 Ethernet
Actor
System Priority:1
MAC Address: 000285:0E1C00
Admin Key: 29
Oper Key: 29
Partner
System Priority:0
MAC Address: 000000:000000
Oper Key: 14
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.12 Line Commands
5.12.1 line
The line global configuration command identifies a specific line for configuration and enters the line configuration command
mode.
Syntax
line {console | telnet | ssh}
ƒ
console — Console terminal line.
ƒ
telnet — Virtual terminal for remote console access (Telnet).
ƒ
ssh — Virtual terminal for secured remote console access (SSH).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example configures the device as a virtual terminal for remote console access.
Console(config)# line telnet
Console(config-line)#
5.12.2 speed
The speed line configuration command sets the line baud rate.
Syntax
speed {bps}
ƒ
bps — Baud rate in bits per second (bps). The options are 2400, 9600, 19200 and 38400.
Default Configuration
This default speed is 115200.
Command Mode
Line Configuration (console) mode
-22
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command, which is available only on the console line.
Examples
The following example the baud rate is set to 19200.
Console (config)# line console
Console(config-line)# speed 19200
5.12.3 exec-timeout
The exec-timeout line configuration command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected. To restore the
default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
exec-timeout minutes [seconds]
no exec-timeout
ƒ
minutes — Integer that specifies the number of minutes. (Range: 0 - 65535)
ƒ
seconds — Additional time intervals in seconds. (Range: 0 - 59)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is 10 minutes.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To specify no timeout, enter the exec-timeout 0 command.
Examples
The following example configures the interval that the system waits until user input is detected to 20 minutes.
Console (config)# line console
Console(config-line)# exec-timeout 20
5.12.4 show line
The show line user EXEC command displays line parameters.
Syntax
show line [console | telnet | ssh]
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
console — Console terminal line.
ƒ
telnet — Virtual terminal for remote console access (Telnet).
ƒ
ssh — Virtual terminal for secured remote console access (SSH).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays the line configuration.
Console# show line
Console configuration:
Interactive timeout: 20
History: 10
Baudrate: 38400
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
Telnet configuration:
Interactive timeout: 10 minutes 10 seconds
History: 10
SSH configuration:
Interactive timeout: 10 minutes 10 seconds
History: 10
5.13 Management ACL Commands
5.13.1 management access-list
The management access-list configuration command defines an access-list for management, and enters the access-list for
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
configuration. Once in the access-list configuration mode, the denied or permitted access conditions are configured with the
deny and permit commands. To remove an access list, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
management access-list name
no management access-list name
ƒ
name — The access list name using up to 32 characters.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command enters the access-list configuration mode, where the denied or permitted access conditions with the deny and
permit commands must be defined.
If no match criteria are defined the default is "deny".
If reentering to an access-list context, the new rules are entered at the end of the access-list.
Use the management access-class command to select the active access-list.
The active management list cannot be updated or removed.
Examples
The following example shows how to create an access-list called "mlist", configure two management interfaces ethernet g1 and
ethernet g9, and make the access-list the active list.
Console (config)# management access-list mlist
Console (config-macl)# permit ethernet g1
Console (config-macl)# permit ethernet g2
Console (config-macl)# exit
Console (config)# management access-class mlist
The following example shows how to create an access-list called "mlist", configure all interfaces to be management interfaces
except interfaces ethernet g1 and ethernet g9, and make the access-list the active list.
Console (config)# management access-list mlist
Console (config-macl)# deny ethernet g1
Console (config-macl)# deny ethernet g2
Console (config-macl)# permit
Console (config-macl)# exit
Console (config)# management access-class mlist
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.13.2 permit (management)
The permit management access-list configuration command defines a permit rule.
Syntax
permit [ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number | out-of-band-eth oob-interface] [service service]
permit ip-source ip-address [mask mask | prefix-length] [ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number |
out-of-band-eth oob-interface] [service service]
ƒ
ethernet interface-number — A valid Ethernet port number.
ƒ
vlan vlan-id — A valid VLAN number.
ƒ
port-channel number — A valid port channel number.
ƒ
ip-address — Source IP address.(Range: Valid IP Address)
ƒ
mask mask — Specifies the network mask of the source IP address. (Range: Valid subnet mask)
ƒ
mask prefix-length — Specifies the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix. The prefix length must be
preceded by a forward slash (/). (Range: 0 - 32)
ƒ
service service — Indicates service type. Can be one of the following: telnet, ssh, http, https or snmp.
ƒ
out-of-band-eth oob-interface — Out of band ethernet port number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Management Access-list Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Rules with Ethernet, VLAN and port-channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate
interface.The system supports up to 256 management access rules.
Example
The following example shows how all ports are permitted in the access-list called "mlist".
Console (config)# management access-list mlist
Console (config-macl)# permit
5.13.3 deny (management)
The deny management access-list configuration command defines a deny rule.
Syntax
deny [ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number ] [service service]
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
deny ip-source ip-address [mask mask | prefix-length] [ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number |
out-of-band-eth oob-interface] ] [service service]
ƒ
ethernet interface-number — A valid Ethernet port number.
ƒ
vlan vlan-id — A valid VLAN number.
ƒ
port-channel number — A valid port-channel number.
ƒ
ip-address — Source IP address. (Range: Valid IP Address)
ƒ
mask mask — Specifies the network mask of the source IP address.(Range: Valid subnet mask)
ƒ
mask prefix-length — Specifies the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix. The prefix length must be
preceded by a forward slash (/).
ƒ
service service — Indicates service type. Can be one of the following: telnet, ssh, http, https or snmp.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Management Access-list Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Rules with Ethernet, VLAN and port-channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate
interface.The system supports up to 256 management access rules.
Example
The following example shows how all ports are denied in the access-list called "mlist".
Console (config)# management access-list mlist
Console (config-macl)# deny
5.13.4 management access-class
The management access-class global configuration command defines which management access-list is used. To disable
restriction, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
management access-class {console-only | name}
no management access-class
ƒ
name — Name of the access list. If unspecified, defaults to an empty access-list.(Range: Valid name)
ƒ
console-only — The device can be managed only from the console.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures an access-list called "mlist" as the management access-list.
Console (config)# management access-class mlist
5.13.5 show management access-list
The show management access-list privileged EXEC command displays management access-lists.
Syntax
show management access-list [name]
ƒ
name — Name of the access list. If unspecified, defaults to an empty access-list.(Range: Valid name)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the active management access-list.
Console# show management access-list
mlist
------permit ethernet g1
permit ethernet g9
! (Note: all other access implicitly denied)
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.13.6 show management access-class
The show management access-class privileged EXEC command displays the active management access-list.
Syntax
show management access-class
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the management access-list information.
Console# show management access-class
Management access-class is enabled, using access list mlist
5.14 PHY Diagnostics Commands
5.14.1 test copper-port tdr
The test copper-port tdr privileged EXEC command diagnoses with TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) technology the quality
and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port.
Syntax
test copper-port tdr interface
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The port can only be tested if cable is connected to both sides.
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The port under test should be shut down during the test, unless it is a combo port with an active fiber port.
The maximum disatance VCT can function is 120 meters.
Examples
The following example results in a report on the cable attached to port e3.
Console# test copper-port tdr e3
Cable is open at 100 meters
The following example results in a failure to report on the cable attached to port e4.
Console# test copper-port tdr e4
Can’t perform the test on fiber ports
5.14.2 show copper-ports tdr
The show copper-ports tdr privileged EXEC command display the last TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) tests on specified
ports.
Syntax
show copper-ports tdr [interface]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the last TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) tests on all ports.
Console# show copper-ports tdr
Port
Result
------e1
e2
e3
e4
----------OK
Short
Test has not been preformed
Short
Length
[meters]
--------------
Date
---------
50
13:32:00 23 July 2003
128
13:32:00 23 July 2003
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
e5
Fiber
-
-
5.14.3 show copper-ports cable-length
The show copper-ports cable-length privileged EXEC command displays the estimated copper cable length attached to a
port.
Syntax
show copper-ports cable-length [interface]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This feature works only on 1-Gbps ports.
Example
The following example displays the estimated copper cable length attached to all ports.
Console# show copper-ports cable-length
Port
Length [meters]
------
---------------------
e1
< 50
e2
Giga link not active
e3
110-140
e4
Fiber
5.14.4 show fiber-ports optical-transceiver
The show fiber-ports optical-transceiver privileged EXEC command displays the optical transceiver diagnostics.
Syntax
show fiber-ports optical-transceiver [interface] [detailed]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
-23
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
Detailed — Detailed diagnostics.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
To test optical transceivers ensure a fiber link is present.
Examples
The following example displays the optical transceiver diagnostics.
console# show fiber-ports optical-transceiver
Port
------
Temp
--------
Voltage
------------
Current
Output
Input
LOS
Power
Power
Power
------------
-----------
----------
---------
g1
W
OK
E
OK
OK
OK
g2
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
e3
Copper
Temp – Internally measured transceiver temperature.
Voltage - Internally measured supply voltage.
Current – Measured TX bias current.
Output Power – Measured TX output power.
Input Power – Measured RX received power.
Tx Fault – Transmitter fault
LOS – Loss of signal
Data ready – Indicates transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready.
N/A - Not Available, N/S - Not Supported, W - Warning, E - Error
The following example displays detailed optical transceiver diagnostics
console# show fiber-ports transceiver detailed
Port
Temp
[C]
Voltage
Current
Output
Input
[Volt]
[mA]
Power
Power
-23
LOS
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
[mWatt]
------
--------
------------
------------
-----------
[mWatt]
----------
---------
e1
48
5.15
50
1.789
No
e2
43
5.15
10
1.789
No
e3
Copper
Temp – Internally measured transceiver temperature.
Voltage - Internally measured supply voltage.
Current – Measured TX bias current.
Output Power – Measured TX output power.
Input Power – Measured RX received power.
Tx Fault – Transmitter fault
LOS – Loss of signal
Data ready – Indicates transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready.
N/A - Not Available, N/S - Not Supported, W - Warning, E - Error
5.15 Port Channel Commands
5.15.1 interface port-channel
The interface port-channel global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode of a specific port-channel.
Syntax
interface port-channel port-channel-number
ƒ
port-channel-number — A valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Seven supported aggregated links are defined, and per port-channel, up to 4 member ports.
Turning off auto-negotiation of an aggregate link may, under some circumstances, make it non-operational. If the other side has
auto-negotiation turned on, it may re-synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half-duplex operation, and may, as per
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
the standards, set them all to inactive.
Example
The following example enters the context of port-channel number 1.
Console (config)# interface port-channel 1
5.15.2 interface range port-channel
The interface range port-channel global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple
port-channels.
Syntax
interface range port-channel {port-channel-range | all}
ƒ
port-channel-range — List of port-channels to configure. Separate non-consecutive port-channels with a comma and no
spaces. A hyphen designates a range of port-channels.
ƒ
all — All the channel-ports.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range. If the command
returns an error on one of the interfaces, it stops the execution of the command on subsequent interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how port-channels 1, 2 and 8 are grouped to receive the same command.
Console (config)# interface range port-channel 1-2
Console (config-if)#
5.15.3 channel-group
The channel-group interface configuration command associates a port with a port-channel. To remove a port from a port
channel, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
channel-group port-channel-number mode {on | auto}
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
no channel-group
ƒ
port-channel_number — Specifies the number of the valid port-channel for the current port to join.
ƒ
on — Forces the port to join a channel.
ƒ
auto — Allows the port to join a channel as a result of an LACP operation.
Default Configuration
The port is not assigned to any port-channel.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Turning off auto-negotiation on an aggregate link may, under some circumstances make it non operational. If the other side has
auto-negotiation turned on, it may re-synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half-duplex operation, and may, as per
the standard, set them all to Inactive.
When a port is added to a LAG, it acquires the trunk properties, as set by the administrator. If the port cannot be configured
accordingly, it will not be added to the LAG, and the user will get an appropriate error message. However, if the first port to join
the LAG is one which cannot be configured according to the administrative settings of the LAG, the port will nonetheless be
added to the LAG, using its port-default settings. An error message is generated; however, it is important to note that, since it is
then the ONLY port of the LAG, the whole LAG at that point operates at the port’s settings, instead of the LAG administrative
settings.
Example
The following example shows how port e5 is configured to port-channel number 1 without LACP.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e5
Console (config-if)# channel-group 1 mode on
5.15.4 show interfaces port-channel
The show interfaces port-channel user EXEC command displays port-channel information (which ports are members of that
port-channel, and whether they are currently active or not).
Syntax
show interfaces port-channel [port-channel-number]
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel number information to display.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how all port-channel information is displayed.
Console (config)# show interfaces port-channel
Channel
Ports
------------
-----------------
ch1
Active: g2
ch2
Active: e3, e7 Inactive: g1
ch3
Active: e4, e8
5.16 Port Monitor Commands
5.16.1 port monitor
The port monitor interface configuration command starts a port monitoring session. To stop a port monitoring session, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
port monitor src-interface [rx | tx]
no port monitor src-interface
ƒ
src-interface — Valid Ethernet port or port-channel number.
ƒ
rx — Monitors received packets only. If no option specified, monitors both rx and tx.
ƒ
tx — Monitors transmitted packets only. If no option specified, monitors both rx and tx.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command enables traffic on one port to be copied to another port, or between the source port (src-interface) and a
destination port (the port being configured). Only a single target port can be defined per system.
The port being monitored cannot be set faster than the monitoring port.
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The following restrictions apply to ports configured to be destination ports:
The port cannot be already configured as a source port.
The port cannot be a member in a port-channel.
An IP interface is not configured on the port.
GVRP is not enabled on the port.
The port is not a member in any VLAN, except for the default VLAN (will automatically be removed from the default VLAN).
The following restrictions apply to ports configured to be source ports:
Port monitoring Source Ports must be simple ports, and not port-channels.
The port cannot be already configured as a destination port.
All the frames are transmitted as either always tagged or always untagged. Refer to the port-monitor vlan-tagging command
below.
General Restrictions:
Ports cannot be configured as a group using the interface range ethernet command.
Note:
The Port Mirroring target must be a member of the Ingress VLAN of all Mirroring source ports. Therefore, multicast and
broadcast frames in these VLANs are seen more than once. (Actually N, where N is the number of mirroring source ports).
When both transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) directions of more than one port are monitored, the capacity may exceed the
bandwidth of the target port. In this case, the division of the monitored packets may not be equal. The user is advised to use
caution in assigning port monitoring.
Example
The following example shows how traffic on port e8 (source port) is copied to port g1 (destination port).
Console(config)# interface ethernet g1
Console(config-if)# port monitor e8
5.16.2 show ports monitor
The show ports monitor user EXEC command displays the port monitoring status.
Syntax
show ports monitor
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how the port copy status is displayed.
Console#show ports monitor
Source Port
Destination Port
----------------
-----------------------
Type
Status
VLAN Tagging
------------
-----------
-------------------
1/1
1/8
RX, TX
Active
No
1/2
1/8
RX, TX
Active
No
1/18
1/8
Rx
Active
No
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.17 QoS Commands
5.17.1 qos
The qos global configuration command enables quality of service (QoS) on the device and enters QoS basic or advanced mode.
Use the no form of this command to disable the QoS features on the device.
Syntax
qos [advanced]
no qos
ƒ
advanced — QoS advanced mode, which enables the full range of QoS configuration.
Default Configuration
By default QoS is enabled in basic mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. However, switching to Basic qos mode sets the trust mode to cos.
Example
The following example shows how QoS is enabled on the device, in basic mode.
Console (config)# qos
5.17.2 show qos
The show qos user EXEC command displays the QoS status.
Syntax
show qos
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays a device where basic mode is supported.
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console# show qos
Qos: basic
Basic trust: dscp
5.17.3 wrr-queue cos-map
The wrr-queue cos-map global configuration command maps assigned CoS values to select one of the egress queues. To
return to the default values, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
wrr-queue cos-map queue-id cos1...cosn
no wrr-queue cos-map [queue-id]
ƒ
queue-id — The queue number to which the following CoS values are mapped.
ƒ
cos1...cosn — Map to specific queues up to eight CoS values from 0 to 7.
Default Configuration
The map default values are as follows:
CoS value 1 select queue 1
CoS value 2 select queue 2
CoS value 0 select queue 3
CoS value 3 select queue 4
CoS value 4 select queue 5
CoS value 5 select queue 6
CoS value 6 select queue 7
CoS value 7 select queue 8
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
You can use this command to distribute traffic into different queues, where each queue is configured with different weighted
round robin (WRR) and Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) parameters.
You enable the expedite queues by using the priority-queue out interface configuration command wrr-queue cos-map.
It is recommended to specifically map a single VPT to a queue, rather than mapping multiple VPTs to a single queue
Example
The following example maps CoS 3 to queue 7.
Console (config)# wrr-queue cos-map 7 3
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.17.4 wrr-queue bandwidth
The wrr-queue bandwidth interface configuration command assigns Weighted Round Robin (WRR) weights to egress queues.
The weights ratio determines the frequency in which the packet scheduler dequeues packets from each queue. To return to the
default values, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
wrr-queue bandwidth weight1 weight2 ... weight_n
no wrr-queue bandwidth
ƒ
weight1...weight_n—Sets the bandwidth ratio in which the WRR packet scheduler dequeues packets. Separate each
value by spaces. (Range: 6 - 255)
Default Configuration
The default WRR weight is 1/8 ratio for all queues (each weight set to 6).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The packet refers to a threshold by the conformance level. Weighted round robin queues should be defined on the interface.
Use the priority-queue out num-of-queues command to globally configure a queue as WRR or Strict Priority.
Use this command to set a weight per interface.
The ratio will be like this:
The ratio for each queue is defined by the queue weight divided by the sum of all queue weights (i.e., the normalized weight).
This actually sets the bandwidth allocation of each queue.
A weight of 0 means no bandwidth is allocated for the same queue, and the share bandwidth is divided among the remaining
queues.
All eight queues are participating excluding the queues that are assigned as expedite queues. The weights of these queues are
ignored in the ratio calculation.
All eight queues participate in the WRR exclude the expedite queues, in which case the corresponded weight is ignored (not
used in the ratio calculation). The expedite queue is a priority queue, and it is serviced until empty before the other queues are
serviced.
Use the priority-queue out num-of-queues command to globally configure a queue as WRR or Strict Priority.
Use this command to set a weight per interface.
Example
The following example sets queue weights as follows:
ƒ
Queue 1—6/36
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
Queue 2—6/36
ƒ
Queue 3—6/36
ƒ
Queue 4—6/36
ƒ
Queue 5—6/36
ƒ
Queue 6—6/36
ƒ
Queue 7—6/36
ƒ
Queue 8—6/36
Console (config-if)# wrr-queue bandwidth 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
5.17.5 priority-queue out num-of-queues
The priority-queue out num-of-queues global configuration command enables the egress queues to be expedite queues. Use
the no form of this command to return to the default values.
Syntax
priority-queue out num-of-queues number-of-queues
no priority-queue out num-of-queues
ƒ
number-of-queues — Assign the number of queues to be expedite queues. The expedite queues would be the queues
with higher indexes. The range is 1 – 8.
Default Configuration
All queues are expedite queues.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When configuring the priority-queue out num-of-queues command, the weighted round robin (WRR) weight ratios are
affected because there are fewer queues participating in WRR.
Example
The following example sets queue 7, 8 to be an EF queue.
Console (config)# priority-queue out num-of-queues 2
5.17.6 show qos interface
The show qos interface user EXEC command displays interface QoS data.
-24
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
show qos interface [ethernet interface-number | vlan vlan-id | port-channel number] [buffers | queuing | policers | shapers]
ƒ
ethernet interface-number — Ethernet port number.
ƒ
vlan vlan-id — VLAN number.
ƒ
port-channel number — Port-channel.
ƒ
buffers — Displays buffer setting for the interface queues. For gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the queue depth for each of
the 8 queues and the thresholds for the WRED/Tail Drop are displayed. For 10/100 interfaces the minimum reserved
settings are displayed.
ƒ
queuing — Displays the queue strategy (WRR or EF), the weight for WRR queues, the CoS to queue map and the EF
priority.
ƒ
shapers — Displays the specified interface shaper and the shaper for the queue on the specified interface.
ƒ
policers — Displays all the policers configured for this interface, their setting, and the number of policers currently
unused.
Default Configuration
For VLAN interface only the policers option is relevant.
If no keyword is specified with the show qos interface command, the port QoS mode, default CoS value, DSCPtoDSCP-mutation map (if any) attached to the port, and policy map (if any) attached to the interface are displayed. If a specific
interface is not specified, the information for all interfaces is displayed.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays output from the show qos interface ethernet e1 buffers command.
Console# show qos interface ethernet e1 buffers
Ethernet e1
Notify Q depth:
qid
Size
1
125
2
125
3
125
4
125
5
125
6
125
7
125
8
125
qid
Threshold
1
100
2
100
3
100
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
4
100
5
N/A
6
N/A
7
N/A
8
N/A
qid
MinDP0
MaxDP0
ProbDP0
MinDP1
MaxDP1
ProbDP1
MinDP2
MaxDP2
ProbDP2
Weight
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5
50
60
13
65
80
6
85
95
4
2
6
50
60
13
65
80
6
85
95
4
2
7
50
60
13
65
80
6
85
95
4
2
8
50
60
13
65
80
6
85
95
4
2
The following example displays output from the show qos interface ethernet g1 queueing command.
Console# show qos interface Ethernet
g1 queuing
Ethernet g1
wrr bandwidth weights and EF priority:
qid
weights
Ef
Priority
1
125
dis
N/A
2
125
dis
N/A
3
125
dis
N/A
4
125
dis
N/A
5
N/A
ena
5
6
125
dis
N/A
7
125
dis
N/A
8
N/A
ena
8
Cos-queue map:
cos
qid
0
3
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
The following example displays output from the show qos interface g1 shapers command.
Console# show qos interface g1 shapers
Ethernet g1
Port shaper: enable
Committed rate: 192000 bps
Committed rate: 192000 bps
Committed burst: 9600 bytes
qid
status
Target Committed
Target Committed Burst
Rate [bps]
[bytes]
100000
17000
1
Enable
2
Disable
N/A
N/A
3
Enable
200000
19000
4
Disable
N/A
N/A
5
Disable
N/A
N/A
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
6
Disable
N/A
N/A
7
Enable
178000
8000
8
Enable
23000
1000
The following example displays output from the show qos interface g1 policers command
Console# show qos interface ethernet g1 policers
Ethernet g1
Class map: A
Policer type: aggregate
Committed rate: 192000 bps
Committed burst: 9600 bytes
Exceed-action: policed-dscp-transmit
Class map: B
Policer type: single
Committed rate: 192000 bps
Committed burst: 9600 bytes
Exceed-action: drop
Class map: C
Policer type: none
Committed rate: N/A
Committed burst: N/A
Exceed-action: N/A
5.17.7 qos map dscp-queue
The qos map dscp-queue global configuration command modifies the DSCP to queue map. To return to the default map, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
qos map dscp-queue dscp-list to queue-id
no qos map dscp-queue
• dscp-list—Specify up to 8 DSCP values, separate each DSCP with a space. (Range: 0 - 63)
• queue-id—Enter the queue number to which the DSCP value corresponds.
QoS Commands
qos trust (Global)
Copyright © 2004 Marvell CONFIDENTIAL Doc. No. MV-S200005-00 Rev. C
January 19, 2004, Preliminary
Document Classification: Proprietary Information Page 147
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
The following table describes the default map.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Queue settings for 3, 11, 19, ... cannot be modified.
Example
The following example maps DSCP values 33, 40 and 41 to queue 1.
Console (config)# qos map dscp-queue 33 40 41 to 1
5.17.8 qos trust (Global)
The qos trust global configuration command can be used in basic mode to configure the system to "trust" state.
To return to the default state, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
qos trust {cos | dscp | tcp-udp-port}}
no qos trust
ƒ
cos — Classifies ingress packets with the packet CoS values. For untagged packets, the port default CoS is used.
ƒ
dscp — Classifies ingress packets with the packet DSCP values.
ƒ
tcp-udp-port — Classifies ingress packets with the packet destination port values.
Default Configuration
If the system is in basic mode then CoS is the default trust mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command can be used only in QoS basic mode.
Packets entering a quality of service (QoS) domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain. When the packets are
classified at the edge, the switch port within the QoS domain can be configured to one of the trusted states because there is no
need to classify the packets at every switch within the domain.
Use this command to specify whether the port is trusted and which fields of the packet to use to classify traffic.
DSCP value 0-7 8-15 16-23 24-31 32-39 40-47 48-56 57-63
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Queue-ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
For an inter-QoS domain boundary, the port can be configured to the DSCP-trusted state and apply the
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map, if the DSCP values are different between the QoS domains.
To return to the untrusted state, use the no qos command to apply best effort service.
Example
The following example configures the system in basic mode to DSCP trust state.
Console (config)# qos trust dscp
5.17.9 qos trust (Interface)
The qos trust interface configuration command enables each port trust state while the system is in basic mode.
To disable the trust state on each port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
qos trust
no qos trust
Default Configuration
Each port is enabled while the system is in basic mode.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
Use no qos trust to disable the trust mode on each port.
Use qos trust to enable trust mode on each port.
Example
The following example configures port e5 in basic mode to default trust state (CoS).
Console (config)# interface ethernet e5
Console (config-if) qos trust
5.17.10 qos cos
The qos cos interface configuration command configures the default port CoS value. To return to the default setting, use the no
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
form of this command.
Syntax
qos cos default-cos
no qos cos
qos cos override
ƒ
default-cos — Specifies the default CoS value being assigned to the port. If the port is trusted and the packet is untagged
then the default CoS value becomes the CoS value. (Range: 0 - 7)
Default Configuration
Port CoS is 0.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) command
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures port e5 default CoS value to 3.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e5
Console (config-if) qos cos 3
5.17.11 qos cos override
The qos cos override interface configuration command overrides the CoS of incoming packets. To disable the override, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
qos cos override
no qos cos override
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
CoS Override is disabled
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, Port-Channel).
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
This command enables to override the CoS value of tagged packets, with the value configured by the qos cos command.
Example
The following example overrides the CoS of incoming packets.
Console(config)# qos cos override
5.17.12 show qos map
The show qos map user EXEC command displays all the QoS maps.
Syntax
show qos map [dscp-queue | policed-dscp | dscp-mutation]
ƒ
dscp-queue — Displays the DSCP to queue map.
ƒ
policed-dscp — Displays the DSCP to DSCP remark table.
ƒ
dscp-mutation — Displays the DSCP-DSCP mutation table.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC command
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the DSCP port-queue map.
console# show qos map
Dscp-queue map:
d1 :
d2 0
1
2
----
----
0:
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
1:
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
2:
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
3:
04
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
4:
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
07
5:
07
07
07
07
07
07
6:
08
08
08
08
----
3
---
----
4
----
5
----
6
----
08
-25
----
08
7
8
----
----
08
9
08
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The following example displays the policed-DSCP map.
Policed-dscp map:
d1 :
d2 0
1
2
----
3
---
----
4
----
5
6
---- ----
----
7
8
9
----
-------
---- ----
0:
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
1:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2:
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3:
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4:
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5:
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
6:
60
61
62
63
The following example displays the DSCP-dscp mutation map.
Dscp-dscp mutation map:
d1 :
d2 0
1
----
-------
0:
00
01
02
1:
10
11
2:
20
3:
----
2
----
3
-----
----
4
5
6
7
8
----
-----
---- ----
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4:
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5:
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
6:
60
61
62
63
9
----
5.18 Radius Commands
5.18.1 radius-server host
The radius-server host global configuration command specifies a RADIUS server host. To delete the specified
RADIUS host, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server host {ip-address} [auth-port auth-port-number] [timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit] [deadtime deadtime]
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
[key key] [source source] [priority priority]
no radius-server host ip-address
ƒ
ip-address — IP address of the RADIUS server host. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the
usage guidelines.
ƒ
timeout — Specifies the timeout value in seconds. If no timeout value is specified, the global value is used. (Range: 1 30)
ƒ
retransmit — Specifies the re-transmit value. If no re-transmit value is specified, the global value is used. (Range: 1 -10)
ƒ
deadtime — Length of time, in minutes, for which a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests. (Range 0 2000)
ƒ
key — Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the
RADIUS server. This key must match the encryption used on the RADIUS daemon. If no key value is specified, the
global value is used.
ƒ
source — Specifies the source IP address to use for the communication. If no retransmit value is specified, the global
value is used. 0.0.0.0 is interpreted as request to use the IP address of the outgoing IP interface. An out-of-band IP
address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines.priority—Determines the order in which the servers are
used, where 0 is the highest priority (Range: 0 - 65535).
ƒ
priority — Determines the order in which the servers are used, where 0 is the highest priority. (Range: 0 - 65535)
Default Configuration
By default, no RADIUS host is specified.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To specify multiple hosts, multiple radius-server host commands can be used.
If no host-specific timeout, retransmit, deadtime or key values are specified, the global values apply to each host.
To define a radius server on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format —oob/ip-address.
The address type of the source parameter must be the same as the ip-address parameter.
Example
The following example specifies a RADIUS server host with the following characteristics:
ƒ
Server host IP address — 192.168.10.1
ƒ
Authentication port number — 20
ƒ
Timeout period — 20 seconds
Console (config)# radius-server host 192.168.10.1 auth-port 20 timeout 20
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.18.2 radius-server key
The radius-server key global configuration command sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS
communications between the router and the RADIUS daemon. To reset to the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server key [key-string]
no radius-server key
ƒ
key-string — Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the
RADIUS server. This key must match the encryption used on the RADIUS daemon. The key can be up to 128 characters
long.
Default Configuration
The default is an empty string.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the
device and the RADIUS daemon to "abc-server".
Console (config)# radius-server key abc-server
5.18.3 radius-server retransmit
The radius-server retransmit global configuration command specifies the number of times the software searches the list of
RADIUS server hosts. To reset the default configuration, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server retransmit retries
no radius-server retransmit
Default Configuration
The default is 3 attempts.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
-25
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts to 5 attempts.
Console (config)# radius-server retransmit 5
5.18.4 radius-server source-ip
The radius-server source-ip global configuration command specifies the source IP address used for communication with
RADIUS servers. To return to the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server source-ip source
no radius-server-ip
ƒ
source — Specifies the source IP address.
Default Configuration
The default IP address is the outgoing IP interface.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To define an out-of-band IP address, use the out-of-band IP address format —oob/ip-address.
Example
The following example configures the source IP address used for communication with RADIUS servers to 10.1.1.1.
Console (config)# radius-server source-ip 10.1.1.1
5.18.5 radius-server timeout
The radius-server timeout global configuration command sets the interval for which a router waits for a server host to reply. To
restore the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server timeout timeout
no radius-server timeout
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
timeout — Specifies the timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1 - 30)
Default Configuration
The default value is 3 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets the interval for which a router waits for a server host to reply to 5 seconds.
Console (config)# radius-server timeout 5
5.18.6 radius-server deadtime
The radius-server deadtime global configuration command improves RADIUS response times when servers are unavailable.
The command is used to cause the unavailable servers to be skipped. To reset the default value, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
radius-server deadtime deadtime
no radius-server deadtime
ƒ
deadtime — Length of time in minutes, for which a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests. (Range: 0 2000)
Default Configuration
The default dead time is 0 minutes.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets a dead time where a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests for this period, to 10
minutes.
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console (config)# radius-server deadtime 10
5.18.7 show radius-servers
The show radius-servers user EXEC command displays the RADIUS server settings.
Syntax
show radius-servers
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays the RADIUS server settings.
Console# show radius-servers
Port
IP address
Auth
Acct
TimeOut
Retransmit
Deadtime Source IP
Priority
Usage
---------------
--------
-------
--------------
----------------
--------------- ---------------
----------
---------
172.16.1.1 1645
1646
Global
Global
172.16.1.2 1645
1646
11
8
Global
Global
Global
Global
1
2
All
OOB RADIUS servers
Port
IP address
Auth
Acct
TimeOut
Retransmit
Deadtime
Source IP Priority
---------------- -------
--------
--------------
------------------
-------------
---------------
176.16.8.9
1646
1645
Global
Global
Global
Global values
------------------TimeOut: 3
Retransmit: 3
Deadtime: 0
Source IP: 172.16.8.1
-26
Global
All
----------1
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.19 RMON Commands
5.19.1 show rmon statistics
The show rmon statistics user EXEC command displays RMON Ethernet Statistics.
Syntax
show rmon statistics {ethernet interface number | port-channel port-channel-number}
ƒ
interface number — Valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics for port g1.
Console# show rmon statistics ethernet g1
Port g1
Dropped: 8
Octets: 878128 Packets: 978
Broadcast: 7 Multicast: 1
CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0
Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0
Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0
64 Octets: 98 65 to 127 Octets: 0
128 to 255 Octets: 0 256 to 511 Octets: 0
512 to 1023 Octets: 491 1024 to 1518 Octets: 389
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Dropped
Description
The total number of events in which packets are dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
This number is not always the number of packets dropped; it is the number of
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
times this condition has been detected.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
Broadcast
The total number of good packets received and directed to the broadcast address. This does
not include multicast packets.
Multicast
The total number of good packets received and directed to a multicast address. This number
does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received with a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Pkts
The total number of packets received less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets) and otherwise well formed.
Oversize Pkts
The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets) and otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets) and either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets), and either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
64 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
65 to 127 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 65 and 127
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
128 to 255 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 128 and 255
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
256 to 511 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 256 and 511
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
512 to 1023 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 512 and1023
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
1024 to 1518
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 1024 and 1518
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Octets
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.19.2 rmon collection history
The rmon collection history interface configuration command enables a Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB history statistics
group on an interface. To remove a specified RMON history statistics group, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
rmon collection history index [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds]
no rmon collection history index
ƒ
Index — The requested statistics index group. (Range: 1 - 65535)
ƒ
owner ownername — Records the RMON statistics group owner name. If unspecified, the name is an empty string.
ƒ
buckets bucket-number — A value associated with the number of buckets specified for the RMON collection history
group of statistics. If unspecified, defaults to 50. (Range: 1 - 65535)
ƒ
interval seconds — The number of seconds in each polling cycle. If unspecified, defaults to 1800. (Range: 1 - 3600)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
This command cannot be executed on multiple ports using the interface range ethernet command.
Example
The following example enables a Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB history statistics group on port e8 with the index number "1"
and a polling interval period of 2400 seconds.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# rmon collection history 1 interval 2400
5.19.3 show rmon collection history
The show rmon collection history user EXEC command displays the requested history group configuration.
Syntax
show rmon collection history [ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — Valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel trunk index.
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays all RMON group statistics.
Console# show rmon collection history
Index
Interface
-------
----------
1
1
Interval
Requested
Granted
Samples
Sample
----------1000
--------------50
-----------50
Owner
--------CLI
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Index
An index that uniquely identifies the entry.
Interface
The sampled Ethernet interface
Interval
The interval in seconds between samples.
Requested Samples
The requested number of samples to be saved.
Granted Samples
The granted number of samples to be saved.
Owner
The entity that configured this entry.
5.19.4 show rmon history
The show rmon history user EXEC command displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history.
Syntax
show rmon history index {throughput | errors | other} [period seconds]
ƒ
index — The requested set of samples. (Range: 1 - 65535)
ƒ
throughput — Displays throughput counters.
ƒ
errors — Displays error counters.
ƒ
other — Displays drop and collision counters.
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
period seconds — Specifies the requested period time to display. (Range: 1 - 4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for "throughput" on index number 5.
Console# show rmon history 5 throughput
Sample Set: 1 Owner: CLI
Interface: g1 Interval: 1800
Requested samples: 50 Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 500
Time
-----------------------------
Octets
Packets
Broadcast
-------------
--------------
-----------------
Multicast
%
---------
------
Jan 18 2002 21:57:00
303595962
357568
3289
7287
19.98%
Jan 18 2002 21:57:30
287696304
275686
2789
2789
20.17%
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for "errors" on index number 5.
Console# show rmon history 5 errors
Sample Set: 1 Owner: CLI
Interface: 1/g1 Interval: 1800
Requested samples: 50 Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 500
Time
CRC Align
Undersize
Oversize
Fragments
Jabbers
-------------
---------------
-------------
------------------------------
---------------
----------------
Jan 18 2002 21:57:00
1
1
49
0
0
Jan 18 2002 21:57:30
1
1
27
0
0
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for "other" on index number 5.
Console# show rmon history 5 other
Sample Set: 1
Owner: CLI
Interface: 1/g1
Interval: 1800
Requested samples: 50
Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 500
Time
Dropped
-------------------------------
Collisions
--------------
--------------
Jan 18 2002 21:57:00
3
0
Jan 18 2002 21:57:30
3
0
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Time
Date and Time the entry is recorded.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets)
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast
address. This number does not include packets addressed to the broadcast address.
Utilization%
The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling
interval, in hundredths of a percent.
CRC
Align The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
etherHistoryFragments to increment because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due
to collisions) and noise hits.
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of
octets (AlignmentError). It is normal for
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
Dropped
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources
during this sampling interval. This number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped, it is
just the number of times this condition has been detected.
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling
interval.
5.19.5 rmon alarm
The rmon alarm global configuration command configures alarm conditions. To remove an alarm, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
rmon alarm index variable interval rthreshold fthreshold revent fevent [type type] [startup direction] [owner name]
no rmon alarm index
ƒ
index — The alarm index. (Range: 1 - 65535)
ƒ
variable — The object identifier of the particular variable to be sampled.
ƒ
interval — The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling
ƒ
thresholds. (Range: 1 - 4294967295)
ƒ
rthreshold — Rising Threshold. (Range: 1 - 4294967295)
ƒ
fthreshold — Falling Threshold. (Range: 1 - 4294967295)
ƒ
revent — The Event index used when a rising threshold is crossed .(Range: 0 - 65535)
ƒ
fevent — The Event index used when a falling threshold is crossed. (Range: 0 - 65535)
ƒ
type type — The sampling method for the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the
thresholds. If the method is absolute, the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the
end of the sampling interval. If the method is delta, the selected variable value at the last sample is subtracted from the
current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds.
-26
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
startup direction — The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid. If the first sample (after this entry
becomes valid) is greater than or equal to the rthreshold, and direction is equal to rising or rising-falling, then a single
rising alarm is generated. If the first sample (after this entry becomes valid) is less than or equal to the fthreshold, and
direction is equal to falling or rising-falling, then a single falling alarm is generated.
ƒ
owner name — Enter a name that specifies who configured this alarm. If unspecified, the name is an empty string.
Default Configuration
The following parameters have the following default values:
type type — If unspecified, the type is absolute.
startup direction — If unspecified, the startup direction is rising-falling.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the following alarm conditions:
ƒ
Alarm index — 1000
ƒ
Variable identifier — abc
ƒ
Sample interval — 360000 seconds
ƒ
Rising threshold — 1000000
ƒ
Falling threshold — 1000000
ƒ
Rising threshold event index — 10
ƒ
Falling threshold event index — 20
Console (config)# rmon alarm 1000 abc 360000 1000000 1000000 10 20
5.19.6 show rmon alarm-table
The show rmon alarm-table user EXEC command displays the alarms summary table.
Syntax
show rmon alarm-table
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the alarms summary table.
Console# show rmon alarm-table
Index
OID
Owner
-------
---------------------------------------
-----------
1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
CLI
2
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
Manager
3
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.9
CLI
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Index
An index that uniquely identifies the entry.
OID
Monitored variable OID.
Owner
The entity that configured this entry.
5.19.7 show rmon alarm
The show rmon alarm user EXEC command displays alarm configuration.
Syntax
show rmon alarm number
ƒ
number — Alarm index. (Range: 1 - 65535)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
The following example displays RMON 1 alarms.
Console# show rmon alarm 1
Alarm 1
----------OID: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
Last sample Value: 878128
Interval: 30
Sample Type: delta
Startup Alarm: rising
Rising Threshold: 8700000
Falling Threshold: 78
Rising Event: 1
Falling Event: 1
Owner: CLI
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
OID
Monitored variable OID.
Last Sample Value
The statistic value during the last sampling period. For example, if the sample type is
delta, this value is the difference between the samples at the beginning and end of the
period. If the sample type is absolute, this value is the sampled value at the end of the
period.
Alarm
Alarm index.
Owner
The entity that configured this entry.
Interval
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and
falling thresholds.
Sample Type
The method of sampling the variable and calculating the value compared against the
thresholds. If the value is absolute, the value of the variable is compared directly with the
thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. If the value is delta, the value of the
variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value, and the difference
compared with the thresholds.
Startup Alarm
The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set. If the first sample is greater than or
equal to the rising threshold, and startup alarm is equal to rising or rising and falling, then
a single rising alarm is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling
threshold, and startup alarm is equal falling or rising and falling, then a single falling alarm
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
is generated.
Rising Threshold
A sampled statistic threshold. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to
this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval is less than this threshold, a
single event is generated.
Falling Threshold
A sampled statistic threshold. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this
threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval is greater than this threshold, a
single event is generated.
Rising Event
The event index used when a rising threshold is crossed.
Falling Event
The event index used when a falling threshold is crossed.
5.19.8 rmon event
The rmon event global configuration command configures an event. To remove an event, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
rmon event index type [community text] [description text] [owner name]
no rmon event index
ƒ
index — The event index. (Range: 1 - 65535)
ƒ
type — The type of notification that the device generates about this event. Can have the following values: none, log,
trap, log-trap. In the case of log, an entry is made in the log table for each event. In the case of trap, an SNMP trap is
sent to one or more management stations.
ƒ
community text — If an SNMP trap is to be sent, it is sent to the SNMP community specified by this octet string. (Range:
0-127 characters)
ƒ
description text — A comment describing this event. (Range: 0-127 characters)
ƒ
owner name — Enter a name that specifies who configured this event. If unspecified, the name is an empty string.
(Range: 0-127 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
The following example configures an event with the trap index of 10
Console (config)# rmon event 10 log
.
5.19.9 show rmon events
The show rmon events user EXEC command displays the RMON event table.
Syntax
show rmon events
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the RMON event table.
Console# show rmon events
Index
Description
Type
Community
Owner
Last time sent
---------
-----------------
--------
-----------------
------------
--------------------
1
Errors
Log
2
High Broadcast
Log-Trap
router
CLI
Jan 18 2002 23:58:17
Manager
Jan 18 2002 23:59:48
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Index
An index that uniquely identifies the event.
Description
A comment describing this event.
Type
The type of notification that the device generates about this event. Can have the following
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
values: none, log, trap, log-trap. In the case of log, an entry is made in the log table for each
event. In the case of trap, an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations.
Community
If an SNMP trap is to be sent, it is sent to the SNMP community specified by this octet string.
Owner
The entity that configured this event.
Last time sent
The time this entry last generated an event. If this entry has not generated any events, this
value is zero.
5.19.10 show rmon log
The show rmon log user EXEC command displays the RMON logging table.
Syntax
show rmon log [event]
ƒ
event — Event index. (Range: 0 - 65535)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the RMON logging table.
Console# show rmon log
Maximum table size: 500
Event
--------1
1
2
Description
----------------Errors
Errors
High Broadcast
Time
--------Jan 18 2002 23:48:19
Jan 18 2002 23:58:17
Jan 18 2002 23:59:48
Console# show rmon log
Maximum table size: 500 (800 after reset)
Event
---------
Description
----------------
Time
---------
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
1
1
2
Errors
Errors
High Broadcast
Jan 18 2002 23:48:19
Jan 18 2002 23:58:17
Jan 18 2002 23:59:48
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Event
An index that uniquely identifies the event.
Description
A comment describing this event.
Time
The time this entry created.
5.19.11 rmon table-size
The rmon table-size global configuration command configures the maximum RMON tables sizes. To return to the default
configuration, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
rmon table-size {history entries | log entries}
no rmon table-size {history | log}
ƒ
history entries — Maximum number of history table entries. (Range: 20 - 32767)
ƒ
log entries — Maximum number of log table entries. (Range: 20 - 32767)
Default Configuration
History table size is 270.
Log table size is 100.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The configured table size is effective after the device is rebooted.
Example
The following example configures the maximum RMON history table sizes to 1000 entries.
Console (config)# rmon table-size history 1000
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.20 SNMP Commands
5.20.1 snmp-server community
The snmp-server community global configuration command sets up the community access string to permit access to the
SNMP protocol. To remove the specified community string, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server community community [ro | rw | su] [ip-address]
snmp-server community-group community group-name [ip-address]
no snmp-server community string [ip-address]
ƒ
community — Character string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Range: 1 - 20
characters)
ƒ
ro — Specifies read-only access.
ƒ
rw — Specifies read-write access.
ƒ
su — Specifies SNMP administrator access.
ƒ
ip-address — Management station IP address. Default is all IP addresses. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as
described in the usage guidelines.
ƒ
group-name — Name of a previously defined group. The group defines the objects available to the community. (Range: 1
- 30 characters)
ƒ
The View-name command cannot be specified for su, which has access to the whole MIB. However, the View-name
command can be used to restrict the access rights of a community string.
Specifying a view-name parameter does the following:
ƒ
Generates an internal security-name.
ƒ
Maps the internal security-name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to an internal group-name.
ƒ
Maps the internal group-name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to view-name (read-view and notify-view
always, and for rw for write-view also)
The group-name command can be used to restrict the access rights of a community string.
Specifying a group-name parameter does the following:
ƒ
Generates an internal security-name.
ƒ
Maps the internal security-name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to the group-name.
To define a management station on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format —oob/ipaddress.
For a user to define OOB management port configurations, such as ip address, default gateway, RADIUS, and so forth, you
must define two SNMP communities. A super user can configure OOB management port settings with a single community, by
switching between the two communities.
The OOB/ip address indicates whether the selected management station being configured is an OOB management station.
The type is used for a different purpose. From an SNMP perspective, the OOB port is treated as a separate device. Therefore,
when defining an SNMP community, the administrator must indicate which tables are being configured. If type is oob, this
indicates that OOB tables are being configured. If type is router, it means that the device's tables are being configured.
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
No community is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets up the community access string "public" to permit administrative access to SNMP protocol, at an
administrative station with the IP address 192.168.1.20.
Console (config)# snmp-server community public su 192.168.1.20
The following examples set up the community access string "public" to permit read-write access to SNMP protocol, using the
out-of-band port for 192.175.1.10.
Console (config)# snmp-server community public rw 192.175.1.10 type oob
5.20.2 snmp-server contact
The snmp-server contact global configuration command sets up a system contact. To remove the system contact information,
use the no form of the command.
Syntax
snmp-server contact text
no snmp-server contact
ƒ
text — Character string, up to 160 characters, describing the system contact information.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Do not include spaces in the text string.
Example
The following example displays setting up the system contact point as "abc_Technical_Support".
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console (config)# snmp-server contact abc_Tecnical_Support
5.20.3 snmp-server location
The snmp-server location global configuration command sets up information on where the device is located. To remove the
location string use, the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
text — Character string, up to 160 characters, describing the system location.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Do not include spaces in the text string.
Example
The following example sets the device location as "New_York".
Console (config)# snmp-server location New_York
5.20.4 snmp-server enable traps
The snmp-server enable traps global configuration command enables the switch to send SNMP traps. To disable SNMP traps
use the no form of the command.
Syntax
snmp-server enable traps
no snmp-server enable traps
Default Configuration
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-27
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Examples
The following example displays the command to enable SNMP traps.
Console (config)# snmp-server enable traps
5.20.5 snmp-server trap authentication
The snmp-server trap authentication global configuration command enables the switch to send Simple Network Management
Protocol traps when authentication fails. To disable SNMP authentication failed traps, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server trap authentication
no snmp-server trap authentication
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays the command to enable authentication failed SNMP traps.
Console (config)# snmp-server trap authentication
Console (config)# snmp-server host 10.1.1.1 management 2
5.20.6 snmp-server host
The snmp-server host global configuration command specifies the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol
notification operation. To remove the specified host, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server host host-addr community-string [1 | 2]
no snmp-server host host-addr
ƒ
host-address — Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient). An out-of-band IP address can be specified as
described in the User Guidelines.
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
community-string — Password-like community string sent with the notification operation. (R ange: 1 - 20 characters)
ƒ
1 — SNMPv1 traps is used.
ƒ
2 — SNMPv2 traps is used (Default).
Default Configuration
The default is SNMPv2.
UDP Port - 162
timeout - 15 seconds
retries - 3.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If a trap and inform are defined on the same target, and an inform was sent, the trap is not sent.
An inform request is held in memory until a response is received or the request times out. An inform can be resent or retried
several times, but traps are sent only once. Network traffic is increased with retries. Therefore, traps and informs require a
trade-off between reliability and resources. Inform requests should be used, if it is important that the SNMP manager receives
every notification. If traffic on the network or memory in the switch is a concern and notification is not required, traps should be
used.
To define an SNMP recipient on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format — oob/ip-address.
Use only unicast IP addresses.
Example
The following example enables SNMP traps for host 10.1.1.1 with community string "management" using SNMPv2.
Console (config)# snmp-server host 10.1.1.1 management 2
5.20.7 snmp-server set
The snmp-server set global configuration command sets SNMP MIB value by the CLI.
Syntax
snmp-server set variable-name name1 value1 [name2 value2 …]
ƒ
variable-name — MIB variable name.
ƒ
name value... — List of name and value pairs. In case of scalar MIBs there is only a single pair of name values. In case
of entry in a table the first pairs are the indexes, followed by one or more fields.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Although the CLI can set any required configuration, there might be a situation where a SNMP user sets a MIB variable that
does not have an equivalent command. In order to generate configuration files that support those situations, the snmp-server
set command is used.
This command is context sensitive.
Examples
The following example sets the scalar MIB "sysName" to have the value "abc".
Console (config)# snmp-server set sysName sysname abc
The following example sets the entry MIB "rndCommunityTable" with keys 0.0.0.0 and "public". The field rndCommunityAccess
gets the value "super" and the rest of the fields get their default values.
Console (config)# snmp-server set rndCommunityTable
rndCommunityMngStationAddr 0.0.0.0 rndCommunityString public
rndCommunityAccess super
5.20.8 show snmp
The show snmp privileged EXEC command displays the SNMP status.
Syntax
show snmp
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the SNMP communications status.
Console# show snmp
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Community-String
------------------------public
private
private
Community-Access
---------------------------read only
read write
read write
OOB management stations
Community-String
Community-Access
---------------------------------------------------private
read write
IP address
-----------------All
172.16.1.1
172.17.1.1
IP address
-----------------176.16.8.9
Traps are enabled.
Authentication trap is enabled.
Trap-Rec-Address
192.122.173.42
OOB trap receivers
Trap-Rec-Address
176.16.8.9
Trap-Rec-Community
public
Version
2
Trap-Rec-Community
public
Version
2
System Contact: Robert
System Location: Marketing
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.21 Spanning-Tree Commands
5.21.1 spanning-tree
The spanning-tree global configuration command enables spanning-tree functionality. To disable spanning-tree functionality,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Default Configuration
Spanning-tree is enabled.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables spanning-tree functionality.
Console(config)# spanning-tree
5.21.2 spanning-tree mode
The spanning-tree mode global configuration command configures the spanning-tree protocol. To return to the default
configuration, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp}
no spanning-tree mode
ƒ
stp — STP is supported.
ƒ
rstp — RSTP is supported.
Default Configuration
Spanning-tree protocol (STP) is supported.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the spanning-tree protocol to RSTP.
Console(config)# spanning-tree mode rstp
5.21.3 spanning-tree forward-time
The spanning-tree forward-time global configuration command configures the spanning-tree bridge forward time, which is the
amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before entering the forwarding state.
To reset the default forward time, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree forward-time seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
ƒ
seconds — Time in seconds .(Range: 4 - 30)
Default Configuration
The default forwarding-time for IEEE Spanning-tree Protocol (STP) is 15 seconds.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures spanning-tree bridge forward time to 25 seconds.
Console(config)# spanning-tree forward-time 25
5.21.4 spanning-tree hello-time
The spanning-tree hello-time global configuration command configures the spanning-tree bridge hello time, which is how often
the switch broadcasts hello messages to other switches.To reset the default hello time, use the no form of this command.
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
spanning-tree hello-time seconds
no spanning-tree hello-time
ƒ
seconds — Time in seconds. (Range: 1 - 10)
Default Configuration
The default hello time for IEEE Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) is 2 seconds.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures spanning-tree bridge hello time to 5 seconds.
Console(config)# spanning-tree hello-time 5
5.21.5 spanning-tree max-age
The spanning-tree max-age global configuration command configures the spanning-tree bridge maximum age.
To reset the default maximum age, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
ƒ
seconds -Time in seconds. (Range: 6 - 40)
Default Configuration
The default max-age for IEEE STP is 20 seconds.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the spanning-tree bridge maximum-age to 10 seconds.
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console(config)# spanning-tree max-age 10
5.21.6 spanning-tree priority
The spanning-tree priority global configuration command configures the spanning-tree priority. The priority value is used to
determine which bridge is elected as the root bridge. To reset the default spanning-tree priority use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority priority
no spanning-tree priority
ƒ
priority — Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 61440 in steps of 4096)
Default Configuration
The default bridge priority for IEEE STP is 32768.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The lower the priority, the more likely the bridge is to be the Root Bridge.
Example
The following example configures spanning-tree priority to 12288.
Console(config)# spanning-tree priority 12288
5.21.7 spanning-tree disable
The spanning-tree disable interface configuration command disables spanning-tree on a specific port. To enable spanning-tree
on a port use, the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree disable
no spanning-tree disable
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
By default, all ports are enabled for spanning-tree.
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example disables spanning-tree on e5.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e5
Console (config-if)# spanning-tree disable
5.21.8 spanning-tree cost
The spanning-tree cost interface configuration command configures the spanning-tree path cost for a port. To reset the default
port path cost, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
ƒ
cost — The port path cost (Range: 1 - 200,000,000 )
Default Configuration
The default costs are as follows:
Port Channel — 20,000
1000 mbps (giga) — 20,000
100 mbps — 200,000
10 mbps — 2,000,000
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
The method used (long or short) is set by using the spanning-tree pathcost method command.
Example
The following example configures the spanning-tree cost on e5 to 35000.
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000
5.21.9 spanning-tree port-priority
The spanning-tree port-priority interface configuration command configures port priority. To reset the default port priority, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree port-priority priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
ƒ
priority — The port priority. (Range: 0 - 240 in multiples of 16)
Default Configuration
The default port-priority for IEEE STP is 128.
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the spanning priority on e5 to 96.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96
5.21.10 spanning-tree portfast
The spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command enables PortFast mode. In PortFast mode, the interface is
immediately put into the forwarding state upon linkup, without waiting for the timer to expire. To disable PortFast mode, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree portfast
no spanning-tree portfast
-28
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
PortFast mode is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
This feature should be used only with interfaces connected to end stations. Otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause
a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operations.
Example
The following example enables PortFast on e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast
5.21.11 spanning-tree link-type
The spanning-tree link-type interface configuration command overrides the default link-type setting. To reset the default, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree link-type {point-to-point | shared}
no spanning-tree spanning-tree link-type
ƒ
point-to-point — Specifies the port link type as point-to-point.
ƒ
shared — Specifies that the port link type is shared.
Default Configuration
The switch derives the link type of a port from the duplex mode. A full-duplex port is considered a point-to-point link, and a
half-duplex port is considered a shared link.
Command Modes
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables shared spanning-tree on e5.
Console(config)# interface ethernet e5
Console(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type shared
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.21.12 spanning-tree pathcost method
The spanning-tree pathcost method command sets the default path cost method. To revert to the default setting, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}
no spanning-tree pathcost method
ƒ
long — Specifies 1 through 200,000,000 range for port path costs.
ƒ
short — Specifies 1 through 200,000,000 range for port path costs.
Default Configuration
Auto
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command applies to all the spanning tree instances on the switch.
The priority value must be a multiple of 4096.
The cost is set using the spanning-tree cost command.
Example
The following example sets the default path cost method to "long".
Console# spanning-tree pathcost method long
5.21.13 spanning-tree bpdu
The spanning-tree bpdu global configuration command defines BPDU handling when spanning-tree is disabled on an
interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpdu {filtering | flooding}
ƒ
filtering — Filter BPDU packets when spanning-tree is disabled on an interface.
ƒ
flooding — Flood BPDU packets when spanning-tree is disabled on an interface.
Default Configuration
The default definition is flooding.
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The command is relevant when spanning-tree is disabled globally or on a single interface..
Example
The following example defines BPDU packet flooding when spanning-tree is disabled on an interface.
Console(config)# spanning-tree bpdu flooding
5.21.14 clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
The clear spanning-tree detected-protocols privileged EXEC command restarts the protocol migration process (force the
renegotiation with neighboring switches) on all interfaces or on the specified interface.
Syntax
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols [ethernet interface number | port-channel port-channel-number]
ƒ
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
ƒ
port-channel-number — A port-channel index.
Default Configuration
If no interface is specified, the action is applied to all interfaces.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This feature should be used only when working in RSTP mode.
Example
The following example restarts the protocol migration process (forces the renegotiation with neighboring switches) on g1.
Console# clear spanning-tree detected-protocols ethernet g1
5.21.15 show spanning-tree
The show spanning-tree privileged EXEC command displays spanning-tree configuration.
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
show spanning-tree [ ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number ]
show spanning-tree [detail] [active | blockedports]
ƒ
interface — The full syntax is: unit/port. (Range: Valid Ethernet port)
ƒ
port-channel-number — Port channel index. (Range:Valid port channel)
ƒ
instance-id — ID associated with a spanning-tree instance.(Range: 1 - 15)
ƒ
detail — Display detailed information.
ƒ
active — Display active ports only.
ƒ
blockedports — Display blocked ports only.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays spanning-tree information.
Console# show spanning-tree
Spanning tree enabled mode RSTP
Default port cost method: short
Root ID
Priority
Address
32768
0001.4297.e000
Cost
57
Port g
1
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Bridge ID
Priority
Address
32768
0002.4b29.7a00
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Number of topology changes 2 last change occurred 2d18h ago
Times:
hold 1, topology change 35, notification 2
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
hello 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Interface
Port ID
Name
Prio. Nbr
-------------
Cost
--------------
Set
---------
------
Designated
Port ID
Cost Bridge ID
Prio. Nbr
-----------------------
---------------
g1
128.1
19
FWD
38 32768 0030.9441.62c1
128.25
g2
128.2
19
FWD
57 32769 0002.4b29.7a00
128.25
ch1
128.65
19
FWD
57 32769 0002.4b29.7a00
128.65
The following example displays spanning-tree information for port g1.
Console# show spanning-tree ethernet g1
Interface
Port ID
Name
-------------
Cost
Set
Prio. Nbr
--------------
g1
Designated
Cost Bridge ID
---------
128.1
-----19
----------------------FWD
38 32768 0030.9441.62c1
Port ID
Prio. Nbr
--------------128.25
Spanning tree enabled
Type: point-to-point (configured: auto)
Port Fast: no (configured: no)
Number of transitions to forwarding state: 1
BPDU: sent 2, received 120638
5.22 SSH and SLOGIN Commands
5.22.1 ip ssh port
The ip ssh port global configuration command specifies the port to be used by the SSH server. To use the default port, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
ip ssh port port-number
no ip ssh port
ƒ
port-number — Port number for use by the SSH server (Range: 1 - 65535).
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
The default value is 22.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example specifies the port to be used by the SSH server as 8080.
Console (config)# ip ssh port 8080
5.22.2 ip ssh server
The ip ssh server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a SSH server. To disable this
function, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip ssh server
no ip ssh server
Default Configuration
This default is SSH is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If encryption keys are not generated, the SSH server is in standby until the keys are generated. To generate SSH server keys,
use the commands crypto key generate rsa, and crypto key generate dsa.
Example
The following example enables the device to be configured from a SSH server.
Console (config)# ip ssh server
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.22.3 crypto key generate dsa
The ip ssh server global configuration command generates DSA key pairs.
Syntax
crypto key generate dsa
Default Configuration
DSA key pairs do not exist.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
DSA keys are generated in pairs: one public DSA key and one private DSA key. If the device already has DSA keys, a warning
and prompt to replace the existing keys with new keys is displayed.
The maximum supported size for the DSA key is 1,024.
This command is not saved in the startup configuration; however, the keys generated by this command are saved in the running
configuration, which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device.
This command may take a considerable period of time to execute.
DSA key size is 2048 bits.
Example
The following example generates DSA key pairs.
Console (config)# crypto key generate dsa
5.22.4 crypto key generate rsa
The crypto key generate rsa global configuration command generates RSA key pairs.
Syntax
crypto key generate rsa
Default Configuration
RSA key pairs do not exist.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
RSA keys are generated in pairs: one public RSA key and one private RSA key. If the device already has RSA keys, a warning
and prompt to replace the existing keys with new keys is displayed.
The maximum supported size for the RSA key is 2048 bits.
This command is not saved in the startup configuration; however, the keys generated by this command are saved in the running
configuration, which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device.
This command may take a considerable period of time to execute.
Example
The following example generates RSA key pairs.
Console (config)# crypto key generate rsa
5.22.5 ip ssh pubkey-auth
The ip ssh pubkey-auth global configuration command enables public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions.
To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip ssh pubkey-auth
no ip ssh pubkey-auth
Default Configuration
The function is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
AAA authentication is independent.
Example
The following example enables public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions.
Console (config)# ip ssh pubkey-auth
5.22.6 crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
The crypto key pubkey-chain ssh global configuration command enters SSH Public Key-chain configuration mode. The mode
is used to manually specify other device public keys such as SSH client public keys.
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Default Configuration
By default, there are no keys.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enters the SSH Public Key-chain configuration mode.
Console(config)# crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Console(config-pubkey-chain)#
5.22.7 user-key
The user-key SSH public key chain configuration command specifies which SSH public key is manually configured and enters
the SSH public key-string configuration command. To remove a SSH public key, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
user-key username {rsa | dsa}
no user-key username
ƒ
username — Specifies the remote SSH client username, which can be up to 48 characters long.
ƒ
rsa — RSA key.
ƒ
dsa — DSA key.
Default Configuration
By default, there are no keys.
Command Mode
SSH Public Key Chain Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Follow this command with the key-string command to specify the key.
Example
The following example enables a SSH public key to be manually configured for the SSH public key chain called "bob".
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console(config-pubkey-chain)# user-key bob
Console(config-pubkey-key)# key-string rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWl
5.22.8 key-string
The key-string SSH public key-string configuration command manually specifies a SSH public key.
Syntax
key-string text
ƒ
text — Authentication string that must be sentand received in the packets, using the routing protocol being authenticated.
The string can contain from 1 to 16 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters.
Default Configuration
By default, the keys do not exist.
Command Mode
SSH Public Key-string configuration
User Guidelines
Use the key-string row command to specify the SSH public key row by row. Each row must begin with the keystring row
command. This command is useful for configuration files.
UU-encoded DER format is the same format in authorized_keys file used by OpenSSH.
Example
The following example enters public key strings for SSH public key clients called "bob".
Console(config)# crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Console(config-pubkey-chain)# user-key bob rsa
Console(config-pubkey-key)# key-string rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWl
Al4kpqIw9GBRonZQZxjHKcqKL6rMlQ+
ZNXfZSkvHG+QusIZ/76ILmFT34v7u7ChFAE+
Vu4GRfpSwoQUvV35LqJJk67IOU/zfwOl1g
kTwml75QR9gHujS6KwGN2QWXgh3ub8gDjTSq
muSn/Wd05iDX2IExQWu08licglk02LYciz
+Z4TrEU/9FJxwPiVQOjc+KBXuR0juNg5nFYsY
0ZCk0N/W9a/tnkm1shRE7Di71+w3fNiOA
6w9o44t6+AINEICBCCA4YcF6zMzaT1wefWwX6f+
-29
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Rmt5nhhqdAtN/4oJfce166DqVX1gWmN
zNR4DYDvSzg0lDnwCAC8Qh
Fingerprint: a4:16:46:23:5a:8d:1d:b5:37:59:eb:44:13:b9:33:e9
5.22.9 show ip ssh
The show ip ssh privileged EXEC command displays the SSH server configuration.
Syntax
show ip ssh
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the SSH server configuration.
Console# show ip ssh
SSH server enabled. Port: 22
RSA key was generated.
DSA (DSS) key was generated.
SSH Public Key Authentication is enabled.
Active incoming sessions:
IP address
SSH username
Version
Cipher
----------------
----------------
---------------
--------------
172.16.0.1
John Brown
2.0 3
DES
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
IP address
Client address
SSH username
User name
Version
SSH version number
Cipher
Encryption type (3DES, Blowfish, RC4)
-30
Auth Code
------------------HMAC-SH1
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Auth Code
Authentication Code (HMAC-MD5, HMAC-SHA1)
5.22.10 show crypto key mypubkey
The show crypto key mypubkey privileged EXEC command displays the SSH public keys on the device.
Syntax
show crypto key mypubkey [rsa | dsa]
rsa—RSA key.
dsa—DSA key.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the SSH public keys on the device.
Console# show crypto key mypubkey rsa
RSA key data:
005C300D 06092A86 4886F70D 01010105 00034B00 30480241 00C5E23B 55D6AB22
04AEF1BA A54028A6 9ACC01C5 129D99E4 64CAB820 847EDAD9 DF0B4E4C 73A05DD2
BD62A8A9 FA603DD2 E2A8A6F8 98F76E28 D58AD221 B583D7A4 71020301 87685768
Fingerprint(Hex): 77:C7:19:85:98:19:27:96:C9:CC:83:C5:78:89:F8:86
Fingerprint(Bubble Babble): yteriuwt jgkljhglk yewiury hdskjfryt gfhkjglk
5.22.11 show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
The show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh privileged EXEC command displays SSH public keys stored on the device.
Syntax
show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh [username username] [fingerprint bubble-babble | hex]
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
username — Specifies the remote SSH client username.
ƒ
bubble-babble — Fingerprints in Bubble Babble format.
ƒ
hex — Fingerprint in Hex format. If fingerprint is unspecified, it defaults to Hex format.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays all SSH public keys stored on the device.
Console# show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Username
----------------
Fingerprint
-----------------------------------------------
bob
9A:CC:01:C5:78:39:27:86:79:CC:23:C5:98:59:F1:86
john
98:F7:6E:28:F2:79:87:C8:18:F8:88:CC:F8:89:87:C8
The following example displays the SSH public called "bob".
Console# show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh username bob
Username: bob
Key: 005C300D 06092A86
5.23 System Management
5.23.1 ping
The ping user EXEC command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.
Syntax
ping ip-address | hostname [size packet_size] [count packet_count] [timeout time_out]
ƒ
ip-address — IP address to ping. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines.
ƒ
hostname — hostname to ping (Range: 1 - 160 characters)
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
packet_size — Number of bytes in a packet. The actual packet size is eight bytes larger than the size specified because
the switch adds header information.(Range: 57 - 1472 bytes)
ƒ
packet_count — Number of packets to send. If 0 is entered it pings until stopped. (Range: 1 - 65535 packets)
ƒ
time_out — Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply. (Range: 1 - 65535 milliseconds
Default Configuration
The default packet size is 56 bytes.
The default packet count is 4 packets.
The default time-out is 1,000 milliseconds.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Press Esc to stop pinging. Following are sample results of the ping command:
Destination does not respond—If the host does not respond, a “no answer from host” message appears in 10 seconds.
Destination unreachable—The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable.
Network or host unreachable—The switch found no corresponding entry in the route table.
To ping an out-of-band IP address, use the out-of-band IP address format — oob/ip-address.
Examples
The following example displays a ping to IP address 10.1.1.1.
Console# ping 10.1.1.1
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=0. time=11 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=1. time=8 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=2. time=8 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=3. time=7 ms
^C
----10.1.1.1 PING Statistics---4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 7/8/11
Console>
5.23.2 traceroute
The traceroute User EXEC command discovers the routes that packets will actually take when traveling to their destination.
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
traceroute ip-address |hostnme [size packet_size] [ttl max-ttl] [count packet_count] [timeout time_out] [source ip-address]
[tos tos]
ƒ
ip-address — IP address of the destination host. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the usage
guidelines. (Range: 1 - 160 characters)
ƒ
hostname — Hostname of the destination host (Range: Valid IP Address)
ƒ
size packet_size — Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 40-1500)
ƒ
ttl max-ttl—The largest TTL value that can be used. The traceroute command terminates when the destination is
reached or when this value is reached. (Range:1-255)
ƒ
count packet_count — The number of probes to be sent at each TTL level. (Range:1-10)
ƒ
timeout time_out — The number of seconds to wait for a response to a probe packet. (Range:1-60)
ƒ
source ip-address — One of the interface addresses of the device to use as a source address for the probes. The
device will normally pick what it feels is the best source address to use. (Range: Valid IP Address)
ƒ
tos tos — The Type-Of-Service byte in the IP Header of the packet. (Range: 0-255)
Default Configuration
size packet_size — The default is 40 bytes.
ttl max-ttl — The default is 30.
count packet_count — The default count is 3.
timeout time_out — The default is 3 seconds.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The traceroute command works by taking advantage of the error messages generated by routers when a datagram exceeds its
time-to-live (TTL) value.
The traceroute command starts by sending probe datagrams with a TTL value of one. This causes the first router to discard the
probe datagram and send back an error message. The traceroute command sends several probes at each TTL level and
displays the round-trip time for each.
The traceroute command sends out one probe at a time. Each outgoing packet may result in one or two error messages. A
"time exceeded" error message indicates that an intermediate router has seen and discarded the probe. A "destination
unreachable" error message indicates that the destination node has received the probe and discarded it because it could not
deliver the packet. If the timer goes off before a response comes in, the traceroute command prints an asterisk (*).
The traceroute command terminates when the destination responds, when the maximum TTL is exceeded, or when the user
interrupts the trace with Esc.
To find the trace to an out-of-band IP address, use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ip-address.
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Examples
console> traceroute umaxp1.physics.lsa.umich.edu
Type Esc to abort.
Tracing the route to umaxp1.physics.lsa.umich.edu (141.211.101.64)
1 i2-gateway.stanford.edu (192.68.191.83) 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec
2 STAN.POS.calren2.NET (171.64.1.213) 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec
3 SUNV--STAN.POS.calren2.net (198.32.249.73) 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec
4 Abilene--QSV.POS.calren2.net (198.32.249.162) 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec
5 kscyng-snvang.abilene.ucaid.edu (198.32.8.103) 33 msec 35 msec 35 msec
6 iplsng-kscyng.abilene.ucaid.edu (198.32.8.80) 47 msec 45 msec 45 msec
7 so-0-2-0x1.aa1.mich.net (192.122.183.9) 56 msec 53 msec 54 msec
8 atm1-0x24.michnet8.mich.net (198.108.23.82) 56 msec 56 msec 57 msec
9***
10 A-ARB3-LSA-NG.c-SEB.umnet.umich.edu (141.211.5.22) 58 msec 58 msec 58 msec
11 umaxp1.physics.lsa.umich.edu (141.211.101.64) 62 msec 63 msec 63 msec
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display
Field
Description
1
Indicates the sequence number of the router in the path to the host.
i2-gateway.stanford.edu
Host name of this router.
192.68.191.83
IP address of this router.
1 msec 1 msec 1 msec
Round-trip time for each of the probes that are sent.
The following table describes the characters that can appear in the traceroute command output.
Field
Description
*
The probe timed out.
?
Unknown packet type.
A
Administratively unreachable. Usually, this output indicates that an access list is
blocking traffic.
H
Host unreachable.
N
Network unreachable.
P
Protocol unreachable.
Q
Source quench.
U
Port unreachable.
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.23.3 telnet
The telnet User EXEC command is used to log in to a host that supports Telnet.
Syntax
telnet ip-address | hostname [port] [keyword1......]
ƒ
ip-address — IP address of the destination host. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the usage
guidelines. (Range: 1 - 160 characters)
ƒ
host — Hostname of the destination host (Range: Valid IP Address)
ƒ
port — A decimal TCP port number, or one of the keywords from the ports table in the usage guidelines. The default is
the Telnet port (decimal23) on the host.
ƒ
keyword — Can be one or more keywords from the keywords table in the User Guidelines.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The Telnet software supports special Telnet commands in the form of Telnet sequences that map generic terminal control
functions to operating system-specific functions. To issue a special Telnet command, enter Esc and then a command character.
If you want to login to host on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ip-address.
Special Telnet Command character
Escape Sequence
Purpose
Ctrl-shift-6 b
Break
Ctrl-shift-6 c
Interrupt Process (IP)
Ctrl-shift-6 h
Erase Character (EC)
Ctrl-shift-6 o
Abort Output (AO)
Ctrl-shift-6 t
Are You There? (AYT)
Ctrl-shift-6 u
Erase Line (EL)
At any time during an active Telnet session, the Telnet commands can be listed by pressing the Ctrl-shift-6 key, followed by a
question mark at the system prompt: Ctrl-shift-6 ?
A sample of this list follows.
The following example displays the system service tag information.
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console> ‘Ctrl-shift-6’ ?
[Special telnet escape help]
Esc B sends telnet BREAK
Esc C sends telnet IP
Esc H sends telnet EC
Esc O sends telnet AO
Esc T sends telnet AYT
Esc U sends telnet EL
Several concurrent Telnet sessions can be opened and switched between them. To open a subsequent session, the current
connection needs to be suspended, by pressing the escape sequence ‘Ctrl-Shift-6’ and ‘x’ to return to the system command
prompt. Then open a new connection with the telnet command.
If you want to login to host on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ip-address.
Keywords Table
Options
Description
/echo
Enables local echo
/quiet
Prevents onscreen display of all messages from the software
/source-interface
Specifies the source interface.
/stream
Turns on stream processing, which enables a raw TCP stream with no Telnet control sequences.
A stream connection does not process Telnet options and can be appropriate for connections to
ports running UNIX-to-UNIX Copy Program (UUCP) and other non-Telnet protocols.
Ports Table
Keyword
Description
Port number
bgp
Border Gateway Protocol
179
chargen
Character generator
19
cmd
Remote commands
514
daytime
Daytime
13
discard
Discard
9
domain
Domain Name Service
53
echo
Echo
7
exec
Exec
512
finger
Finger
79
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ftp
File Transfer Protocol
21
ftp-data
FTP data connections
20
gopher
Gopher
70
hostname
NIC hostname server
101
ident
Ident Protocol
113
irc
Internet Relay Chat
194
klogin
Kerberos login
543
kshell
Kerberos shell
544
login
Login
513
lpd
Printer service
515
nntp
Network News Transport Protocol
119
pop2
Post Office Protocol v2
109
pop3
Post Office Protocol v3
110
pim-auto-rp
PIM Auto-RP
496
smtp
Simple Mail Transport Protocol
25
sunrpc
Sun Remote Procedure Call
111
syslog
Syslog
514
tacacs
TAC Access Control System
49
talk
Talk
517
telnet
Telnet
23
time
Time
37
uucp
Unix-to-Unix Copy Program
540
whois
Nickname
43
www
World Wide Web
80
Example
Console> telnet 176.213.10.50
Esc U sends telnet EL
5.23.4 resume
The resume command in EXEC mode is used to switch to another open Telnet session.
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
resume [connection]
ƒ
connection — The connection number. The default is the most recent connection
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following command switches to another open Telnet session.
Console> resume 176.213.10.50
5.23.5 reload
The reload privileged EXEC command reloads the operating system.
Syntax
reload
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Caution should be exercised when resetting the device, to ensure that no other activity is being performed. In particular, the user
should verify that no configuration files are being downloaded at the time of reset.
Example
The following example reloads the operating system.
Console# reload
-30
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.23.6 hostname
The hostname global configuration command specifies or modifies the device host name. To remove the existing host name,
use the no form of the command.
Syntax
hostname name
no hostname
ƒ
name — The device host name.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example specifies the device host name.
Console (config)# hostname abc
5.23.7 show users
The show users user EXEC command displays information about the active users.
Syntax
show users
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
The following example displays information about the active users.
Console# show users
Username
Protocol
Location
----------------
------------
------------
Bob
Serial
John
SSH
172.16.0.1
Robert
HTTP
172.16.0.8
5.23.8 show sessions
The show sessions command in EXEC mode lists the open Telnet sessions.
Syntax
show sessions
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Console> show sessions
Connection
Host
Address
Port
Byte
----------------
-------------
-------------
--------
-------
1
Remote router
172.16.1.1
23
89
2
172.16.1.2
172.16.1.2
23
8
Field
Description
Connection
Connection number
Host
Remote host to which the device is connected through a Telnet session.
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Address
IP address of the remote host.
Port
Telnet TCP port number
Byte
Number of unread bytes for the user to see on the connection.
5.23.9 show system
The show system user EXEC command displays system information.
Syntax
show system
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the system information.
console# show system
System Description:
System Up Time (days,hour:min:sec):
01,02:48:20
System Contact:
System Name:
System Location:
System MAC Address:
00:03:6d:30:57:00
System Object ID:
1.3.6.1.4.1.89.1.1
Temperature-Indicates the temperature at which the device is currently running. The device temperature is displayed in Celsius.
The device temperature threshold is 0 - 40 C (32 - 104F). The following table displays the temperature in Fahrenheit in
increments of 5.
Celsius
Fahrenheit
0
32
5
41
10
50
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
15
59
20
68
25
77
30
86
35
95
40
104
5.23.10 show version
The show version user EXEC command displays the system version information.
Syntax
show version
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays a system version (this version number is only for demonstration purposes).
Console> show version
SW version x.x.x.xx (date xx-xxx-xxxx time 17:34:19)
Boot version x.x.x.xx (date xx-xxx-xxxx time 11:48:21)
HW version x.x.x
5.24 Syslog Commands
5.24.1 logging on
The logging on global configuration command controls error messages logging. This command sends debug or error
messages to a logging process, which logs messages to designated locations asynchronously to the process that generated the
messages. To disable the logging process, use the no form of this command.
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
logging on
no logging on
Default Configuration
Logging is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The logging process controls the distribution of logging messages to the various destinations, such as the logging buffer, logging
file, or syslog server. Logging on and off for these destinations can be individually configured using the logging buffered,
logging file, and logging global configuration commands. However, if the logging on command is disabled, no messages are
sent to these destinations. Only the console receives messages.
Example
The following example shows how logging is enabled.
Console (config)# logging on
5.24.2 logging
The logging global configuration command logs messages to a syslog server. To delete the syslog server with the specified
address from the list of syslogs, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging {ip-address} [port port] [severity level] [facility facility] [description text]
no logging {ip-address}
ƒ
ip-address — IP address of the host to be used as a syslog server. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as
described in the usage guidelines.
ƒ
port — Port number for syslog messages. If unspecified, the port number defaults to 514. (Range: 1 - 65535)
ƒ
severity level — Limits the logging of messages to the syslog servers to a specified level: emergencies, alerts, critical,
errors, warnings, notifications, informational and debugging. If unspecified, the default level is informational.
ƒ
facility — The facility that is indicated in the message. Can be one of the following values: local0, local1, local2, local3,
local4, local5, local 6, local7. If unspecified, the port number defaults to local7.
ƒ
text — Syslog server description, which can be up to 64 characters.
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
As described in the field descriptions.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Multiple syslog servers can be used.
If no specific severity level is specified, the global values apply to each server.
To define a logging server on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format —oob/ip-address.
Example
The following example configures messages with a "critical" severity level so that they are logged to a syslog server with an IP
address 10.1.1.1.
Console (config)# logging 10.1.1.1 severity critical
5.24.3 logging console
The logging console global configuration command limits messages logged to the console based on severity. To disable
logging to the console terminal, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging console level
no logging console
ƒ
level — Limits the logging of messages displayed on the console to a specified level: emergencies, alerts, critical,
errors, warnings, notifications, informational, debugging.
Default Configuration
The default is informational.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example limits messages logged to the console based on severity level "errors".
Console (config)# logging console errors
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.24.4 logging buffered
The logging buffered global configuration command limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on severity.
To cancel the buffer use, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging buffered level
no logging buffered
ƒ
level — Limits the message logging to a specified level buffer: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings,
notifications, informational, debugging.
Default Configuration
The default level is informational.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
All the syslog messages are logged to the internal buffer. This command limits the commands displayed to the user.
Example
The following example limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on the severity level "debugging".
Console (config)# logging buffered debugging
5.24.5 logging buffered size
The logging buffered size global configuration command changes the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer.
To return the number of messages stored in the internal buffer to the default value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging buffered size number
no logging buffered size
ƒ
number — Numeric value indicating the maximum number of messages stored in the history table. (Range: 20 - 400)
Default Configuration
The default number of messages is 200.
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example changes the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer to 300.
Console (config)# logging buffered size 300
5.24.6 clear logging
The clear logging privileged EXEC command clears messages from the internal logging buffer.
Syntax
clear logging
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example clears messages from the internal syslog message logging buffer.
Console# clear logging
Clear logging buffer [y/n] y
5.24.7 logging file
The logging file global configuration command limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on severity.
To cancel the buffer, use the no form of this command.
23.7.1 Syntax
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
logging file level
no logging file
ƒ
level — Limits the logging of messages to the buffer to a specified level: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors,
warnings, notifications, informational and debugging.
Default Configuration
The default severity level is errors.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on the severity level "alerts".
Console (config)# logging file alerts
5.24.8 clear logging file
The clear logging file privileged EXEC command clears messages from the logging file.
Syntax
clear logging file
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example clears messages from the logging file.
Console# clear logging file
Clear Logging File [y/n] y
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.24.9 show logging
The show logging privileged EXEC command displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal
buffer.
Syntax
show logging
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal buffer.
Console # show logging
Logging is enabled.
Console logging: level debugging. Console Messages: 0 Dropped (severity).
Buffer logging: level debugging. Buffer Messages: 11 Logged, 200 Max.
File logging: level notifications. File Messages: 0 Dropped (severity).
Syslog server 192.180.2.27 logging: errors. Messages: 6 Dropped (severity).
Syslog server 192.180.2.28 logging: errors. Messages: 6 Dropped (severity).
OOB Syslog server 176.16.8.9 logging: errors. Messages: 6 Dropped (severity).
2 messages were not logged (resources)
Buffer log:
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface FastEthernet g0, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet g0, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet g1, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet g2, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet e3, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from memory by console 11-Aug-2002 15:41:39:
%LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet g0, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g0, changed
state to down
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g1, changed
-31
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
state to down
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g2, changed
state to down
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet e3, changed
state to down
5.24.10 show logging file
The show logging file privileged EXEC command displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging
file.
Syntax
show logging file
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging file.
Console # show logging file
Logging is enabled.
Console logging: level debugging. Console Messages: 0 Dropped (severity).
Buffer logging: level debugging. Buffer Messages: 11 Logged, 200 Max.
File logging: level notifications. File Messages: 0 Dropped (severity).
Syslog server 192.180.2.27 logging: errors. Messages: 6 Dropped (severity).
Syslog server 192.180.2.28 logging: errors. Messages: 6 Dropped (severity).
2 messages were not logged (resources)
File log:
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface FastEthernet g0, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet g0, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet g1, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet g2, changed state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Ethernet e3, changed state to up
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
11-Aug-2002 15:41:43: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from memory by console
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet g0, changed
state to up
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g0, changed
state to down
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g1, changed
state to down
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g2, changed
state to down
11-Aug-2002 15:41:39: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Ethernet e3, changed
state to down
5.24.11 show syslog-servers
The show syslog-servers privileged EXEC command displays the syslog servers settings.
Syntax
show syslog-servers
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the syslog server settings.
Console# show syslog-servers
IP address
Port
Severity
Facility
Description
------------
----------------
----------------
------
------------
192.180
14
Informational
local
7
192.180.2.285
14
Warning
local
7
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.25 TACACS Commands
5.25.1 tacacs-server host
The tacacs-server host command in global configuration mode specifies a TACACS+ host. To delete the specified name or
address, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server host {ip-address | hostname} [single-connection] [port port-number] [timeout timeout] [key keystring]
[source source] [priority priority]
no tacacs-server host ip-address
ƒ
ip-address — Name or IP address of the host. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the usage
guidelines.
ƒ
hostname — Hostname of the tacacs server. (Range: 1 - 160 characters)
ƒ
single-connection — Specify single-connection. Rather than have the device open and close a TCP connection to the
daemon each time it must communicate, the single-connection option maintains a single open connection between the
device and the daemon.
ƒ
port-number — Specify a server port number. If unspecified, the port number defaults to 49. (Range: 0 - 65535)
ƒ
timeout—Specifies the timeout value in seconds. If no timeout value is specified, the global value is used. (Range: 1 1000)
ƒ
key-string — Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between the device and
the TACACS server. This key must match the encryption used on the TACACS daemon. If no key string value is
specified, the global value is used. (Range: Up to 160 characters)
ƒ
source — Specifies the source IP address to use for the communication. If no source value is specified, the global value
is used.
ƒ
priority — Determines the order in which the servers will be used, when 0 is the highest priority. If unspecified defaults to
0. (Range: 0 - 65535)
Default Configuration
No TACAS host is specified
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Multiple tacacs-server host commands can be used to specify multiple hosts.
If no host-specific timeout, key or source values are specified, the global values apply to each host.
To define TACACS server on the out-of-band port, use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ip-address.
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Example
The following example specifies a TACACS+ host.
Console (config)# tacacs-server host 172.16.1.1
5.25.2 tacacs-server key
The tacacs-server key command in global configuration mode sets the authentication encryption key used for all TACACS+
communications between the device and the TACACS+ daemon. To disable the key, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server key key-string
no tacacs-server key
ƒ
key-string — Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACAS communications between the router and the
TACACS server. This key must match the encryption used on the TACACS daemon. (Range: Up to 160 characters)
Default Configuration
Empty string
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets the authentication encryption key.
Console (config)# tacacs-server key abc-s
5.25.3 tacacs-server timeout
The tacacs-server timeout command in global configuration mode sets the timeout value. To restore the default, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server timeout timeout
no tacacs-server timeout
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
timeout — Specifies the timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1 - 1000)
Default Configuration
5 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets the timeout value as 300.
Console (config)# tacacs-server timeout 300
5.25.4 tacacs-server source-ip
The tacacs-server source-ip command in global configuration mode specifies the source IP address that will be used for the
communication with TACACS servers. To return to default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server source-ip source
no tacacs-server-ip
ƒ
source — Specifies the source IP address. An out-of-band IP address can be specified as described in the usage
guidelines.(Range: Valid IP Address)
Default Configuration
The IP address would be of the outgoing IP interface.
User Guidelines
To define an out-of-band IP address use the out-of-band IP address format: oob/ip-address.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example specifies the source IP address.
Console (config)# tacacs-server source-ip 172.16.8.1
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.25.5 show tacacs
The show tacacs command in Privileged EXEC mode displays configuration and statistics for a TACACS+ server.
Syntax
show tacacs [ip-address]
ƒ
ip-address — Name or IP address of the host.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays configuration and statistic for a TACACS+server.
Console# show tacacs
IP address
Status
Source IP
Port
Single
TimeOut
Priority
Connection
---------------
---------
---------------
------------
172.16.1.1
Connected
Global
-------
49
----------------
No
--------------
Global
1
Global values
-------------------TimeOut: 3
Source IP: 172.16.8.1
OOB Source IP: 176.16.8.1
OOB TACACS servers
IP address
Source IP
Status
Port
Single
TimeOut
Priority
Connection
---------------
---------
-------
----------------
-32
--------------
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
---------------
------------
172.16.1.1
Connected
Global
49
No
1
Global values
-------------TimeOut: 3
Source IP: 172.16.8.1
OOB Source IP: 176.16.8.1
5.26 User Interface Commands
5.26.1 enable
The enable user EXEC command enters the privileged EXEC mode.
Syntax
enable [privilege-level]
ƒ
privilege-level — Privilege level to enter the system. (Range: 1 - 15)
Default Configuration
The default privilege level is 15.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to enter privileged mode:
Console> enable
enter password:
Console#
-32
Global
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.26.2 disable
The disable privileged EXEC command returns to User EXEC mode.
Syntax
disable [privilege-level]
ƒ
privilege-level — Privilege level to enter the system. (Range: 1 - 15)
Default Configuration
The default privilege level is 1.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to return to normal mode.
Console# disable
Console>
5.26.3 configure
The configure privileged EXEC command enters the global configuration mode.
Syntax
configure
There are no parameters for this command.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In the following example, because no keyword is entered, a prompt is displayed. After the keyword is selected, a message
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
confirming the command entry method is displayed.
Console# configure
Console (config)#
5.26.4 login
The login user EXEC command changes a login username.
Syntax
login
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to enter privileged EXEC mode and login.
Console> login
User Name:admin
Password:* * * * *
Console#
5.26.5 exit(configuration)
The exit command exits any configuration mode to the next highest mode in the CLI mode hierarchy.
Syntax
exit
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
All command modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example changes the configuration mode from Interface Configuration mode to User EXEC mode.
Console(config-if)# exit
Console(config)# exit
Console#
5.26.6 exit(EXEC)
The exit user EXEC command closes an active terminal session by logging off the device.
Syntax
exit
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC command mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example closes an active terminal session.
Console> exit
5.26.7 end
The end global configuration command ends the current configuration session and returns to the privileged command mode.
Syntax
end
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-32
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
All Command modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example ends the current configuration session and returns to the previous command mode.
Console (config)# end
Console #
5.26.8 help
The help command displays a brief description of the help system.
Syntax
help
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
All Command modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
5.26.9 history
The history line configuration command enables the command history function. To disable the command history feature, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
history
no history
Default Configuration
The history function is enabled.
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables the command history function for telnet.
Console (config)# line telnet
Console (config-line)# history
5.26.10 history size
The history size line configuration command changes the command history buffer size for a particular line. To reset the
command history buffer size to the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
history size number-of-commands
no history size
ƒ
number-of-commands—Number of commands that the system records in its history buffer. (Range: 10 - 216)
Default Configuration
The default history buffer size is 10.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example changes the command history buffer size to 100 entries for a particular line.
Console (config-line)# history size 100
5.26.11 show history
The show history user EXEC command lists the commands entered in the current session.
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
show history
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC command mode
User Guidelines
The commands are listed from the first to the latest command.
The buffer is kept unchanged when entering to configuration mode and returning back.
Example
The following example displays all the commands entered while in the current privileged EXEC mode.
Console# show history
show version
show clock
show history
5.26.12 show privilege
The show privilege user EXEC command displays the current privilege level.
Syntax
show privilege
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC command mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the current privilege level.
Console# show privilege
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Current privilege level is 15
5.27 VLAN Commands
5.27.1 vlan database
The vlan database global configuration command enters the VLAN configuration mode.
Syntax
vlan database
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enters the VLAN database mode.
Console (config)# vlan database
Console (config-vlan)#
5.27.2 vlan
Use the vlan interface configuration (VLAN) command to create a VLAN. To delete a VLAN, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
vlan {vlan-range}
no vlan {vlan-range}
ƒ
vlan-range — A list of valid VLAN IDs to be added. List separate, non-consecutive VLAN IDs separated by commas
(without spaces); use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. (Range: 2 - 4063)
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example VLAN number 1972 is created.
Console (config)# vlan database
Console (config-vlan)# vlan 1972
5.27.3 default-vlan disable
The default-vlan disable VLAN configuration command disables the default VLAN functionality. Use the no form of this
command to enable the default VLAN functionality.
Syntax
default-vlan disable
no default-vlan disable
This command has no keywords or arguments.
Default Configuration
Enabled
Command Modes
Vlan configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples1
Console# vlan database
Console(config-vlan)# default-vlan disable
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.27.4 interface vlan
The interface vlan global configuration command enters the interface configuration (VLAN) mode.
Syntax
interface vlan vlan-id
ƒ
vlan-id — The ID of an existing VLAN (excluding GVRP dynamic VLANs).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the VLAN 1 IP address of 131.108.1.27 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
Console (config)# interface vlan 1
Console (config-if)# ip address 131.108.1.27 255.255.255.0
5.27.5 interface range vlan
The interface range vlan global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple VLANs.
Syntax
interface range vlan {vlan-range | all}
ƒ
vlan-range — A list of valid VLAN IDs to add. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces; a
hyphen designates a range of IDs.
ƒ
all — All existing static VLANs.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range. If the command
returns an error on one of the interfaces, an error message is displayed and execution continues on other interfaces.
Example
The following example groups VLAN 221 until 228 and VLAN 889 to receive the same command.
Console (config)# interface range vlan 221-228,889
Console (config-if)#
5.27.6 name
The name interface configuration command adds a name to a VLAN. To remove the VLAN name use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
name string
no name
ƒ
string — Unique name, up to 32 characters in length, to be associated with this VLAN.
Default Configuration
No name is defined.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
The VLAN name should be unique.
Example
The following example names VLAN number 19 with the name "Marketing".
Console (config)# interface vlan 19
Console (config-if)# name Marketing
5.27.7 switchport mode
The switchport mode interface configuration command configures the VLAN membership mode of a port. To reset the mode to
the appropriate default for the device, use the no form of this command.
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
switchport mode {access | trunk | general}
no switchport mode
ƒ
access — Port belongs to a single, untagged VLAN.
ƒ
trunk — Port belongs to 1..4063 VLANs, all tagged (except, optionally, for a single native VLAN).
ƒ
general — Port belongs to 1..4063 VLANs, and each VLAN is explicitly set by the user as tagged or untagged (full
802.1Q mode).
Default Configuration
All ports are in access mode, and belong to the default VLAN (whose VID=1).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures e8 as an untagged layer 2 VLAN interface.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport mode access
5.27.8 switchport access vlan
The switchport access vlan interface configuration command configures the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode.
To reconfigure the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport access vlan vlan-id
no switchport access vlan
ƒ
vlan-id — VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the port is configured.
Default Configuration
VLAN ID=1
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
User Guidelines
The command automatically removes the port from the previous VLAN, and adds it to the new VLAN.
Example
The following example configures a VLAN ID of 23 to the untagged layer 2 VLAN interface number e8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport access vlan 23
5.27.9 switchport trunk allowed vlan
The switchport trunk allowed vlan interface configuration command adds or removes VLANs from a trunk port.
Syntax
switchport trunk allowed vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
ƒ
add vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to add. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. A hyphen
designates a range of IDs.
ƒ
remove vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to remove. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. A
hyphen designate a range of IDs.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 2 and 5 to 8 to the allowed list of e8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2,5-8
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.27.10 switchport trunk native vlan
The switchport trunk native vlan interface configuration command defines the port as a member of the specified VLAN, and
the VLAN ID as the "port default VLAN ID (PVID)". To configure the default VLAN ID, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport trunk native vlan vlan-id
no switchport trunk native vlan
ƒ
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID of the active VLAN.
Default Configuration
VLAN ID=1
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
This command has the following consequences: incoming untagged frames are assigned to this VLAN and outgoing traffic in
this VLAN on this port is sent untagged (despite the normal situation where traffic sent from a trunkmode port is all tagged).
The command adds the port as a member in the VLAN. If the port is already a member in the VLAN (not as a native), it should
be first removed from the VLAN.
Example
The following example e8, in trunk mode, is configured to use VLAN number 123 as the "native" VLAN.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan 123
5.27.11 switchport general allowed vlan
The switchport general allowed vlan interface configuration command adds or removes VLANs from a general port.
Syntax
switchport general allowed vlan add vlan-list [ tagged | untagged ]
switchport general allowed vlan remove vlan-list
ƒ
add vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to add. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. A hyphen
designates a range of IDs.
ƒ
remove vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to remove. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. A
hyphen designates a range of IDs.
-33
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
tagged — Sets the port to transmit tagged packets for the VLANs. If the port is added to a VLAN without specifying
tagged or untagged the default is tagged.
ƒ
untagged — Sets the port to transmit untagged packets for the VLANs.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 2, 5, and 6 to the allowed list.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport general allowed vlan add 2,5,6 tagged
5.27.12 switchport general pvid
The switchport general pvid interface configuration command configures the PVID when the interface is in general mode. To
configure the default value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport general pvid vlan-id
no switchport general pvid
ƒ
vlan-id — PVID (Port VLAN ID). The vlan-id may belong to a non-existent VLAN.
Default Configuration
VLAN ID=1
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to configure the PVID for e8, when the interface is in general mode.
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport general pvid 234
5.27.13 switchport general ingress-filtering disable
The switchport general ingress-filtering disable interface configuration command disables port ingress filtering.
To enable ingress filtering on a port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport general ingress-filtering disable
no switchport general ingress-filtering disable
Default Configuration
Ingress filtering is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows how to enables port ingress filtering on e8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport general ingress-filtering disable
5.27.14 switchport general acceptable-frame-type taggedonly
The switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only interface configuration command discards untagged frames at
ingress. To enable untagged frames at ingress, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
no switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
All frame types are accepted at ingress.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures e8 to discard untagged frames at ingress.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
5.27.15 switchport forbidden vlan
The switchport forbidden vlan interface configuration command forbids adding specific VLANs to a port. This may be used to
prevent GVRP from automatically making these VLANs active on the selected ports. To revert to allowing the addition of specific
VLANs to the port, use the remove parameter for this command.
Syntax
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
ƒ
add vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to add to the "forbidden" list. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no
spaces. A hyphen designates a range of IDs.
ƒ
remove vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to remove from the "forbidden" list. Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a
comma and no spaces. A hyphen designates a range of IDs.
Default Configuration
All VLANs allowed.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example forbids adding VLANs number 234 till 256, to e8.
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport forbidden vlan add 234-256
5.27.16 map protocol protocols-group
The map protocol protocols-group VLAN database command adds a special protocol to a named group of protocols, which
may be used for protocol-based VLAN assignment. To delete a protocol from a group, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
map protocol protocol [encapsulation] protocols-group group
no map protocol protocol encapsulation
ƒ
protocol — The protocol is a protocol number or one of the reserved names. The format is Hex format.
ƒ
encapsulation — One of the following values: ethernet, rfc1042, llcOther. If no option is indicated the default is
ethernet.
ƒ
group — Group number of group of protocols associated together. (Range: 1 - 2147483647)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
The following protocol names are reserved:
ip-arp
ipx
Example
The following example maps protocol ip-arp to the group named "213".
Console (config)# vlan database
Console (config-vlan)# map protocol ip-arp protocols-group 213
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.27.17 switchport general map protocols-group vlan
The switchport general map protocols-group vlan interface configuration command sets a protocol-based classification rule.
To delete a classification, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport general map protocols-group group vlan vlan-id
no switchport general map protocols-group group
ƒ
group — Group number as defined in the map protocol protocols-group command. (Range: 1 - 2147483647)
ƒ
vlan-id — Define the VLAN ID in the classifying rule.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, port-channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets a protocol-based classification rule of protocol group 1 to VLAN 8.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# switchport general map protocols-group 1 vlan 8
5.27.18 ip internal-usage-vlan
The ip internal-usage-vlan interface configuration command reserves a VLAN as the internal usage VLAN of an interface. Use
the no form of this command to reset to default.
Syntax
ip internal-usage-vlan vlan-id
no ip internal-usage-vlan
ƒ
vlan-id — VLAN ID of the internal usage VLAN.(Range: Valid VLAN)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet, port-channel)
User Guidelines
An internal usage VLAN is required when an IP interface is defined on Ethernet port or Port-channel.
Using this command the user can define the internal usage VLAN of a port.
If an internal-usage is not defined for a Port, and the user wants to define an IP interface, the software chooses one of the
unused VLANs.
If a VLAN ID was chosen by the software for internal usage, and the user wants to use that VLAN ID for static or dynamic VLAN,
he should either remove the IP interface, creates the VLAN, and recreate the IP interface, or use this command to define explicit
internal usage VLAN.
Examples
The following example reserves a VLAN as the internal usage VLAN of an interface..
Console (config)# ip internal-usage-vlan 10
5.27.19 show vlan
The show vlan privileged EXEC command displays VLAN information.
Syntax
show vlan [tag vlan-id | name vlan-name]
ƒ
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID
ƒ
vlan-name — A valid VLAN name string. (Range: 1 - 32 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays all VLAN information.
console# show vlan
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Vlan
----
Name
Ports
-----------------
---------------------------
Type
Authorization
-----------
-------------------
other
Required
1
1
e(1,4-8),g(1-2),ch(1-8)
2
VLAN_2
e2
permanent
Required
3
VLAN_3
e3
permanent
Required
5.27.20 show vlan internal usage
The show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command displays a list of VLANs being used internally by the switch.
Syntax
show vlan internal usage
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays all VLAN information.
Console# show vlan internal usage
VLAN
Usage
IP Address
Reserved
--------
---------
-----------------
-----------------
1007
g1
Active
No
1008
g2
Inactive
Yes
1009
e3
Active
Yes
5.27.21 show interfaces switchport
The show interfaces switchport privileged EXEC command displays switchport configuration.
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Syntax
show interfaces switchport {ethernet interface | port-channel port-channel-number}
ƒ
interface — Specific interface, such as ethernet e8.
ƒ
port-channel-number — Valid port-channel trunk index.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays switchport configuration individually for e1.
Console> show interface switchport ethernet e1
Port e1:
Port mode: General
GVRP Status: disabled
Ingress Filtering: true
Acceptable Frame Type: admitAll
Ingress Untagged VLAN (NATIVE) : 1
Port is member in:
Vlan
Name
Egress rule
Type
-------
----------
-----------------
---------
1
default
untagged
System
8
VLAN008
tagged
Dynamic
11
VLAN011
tagged
Static
Forbidden VLANS:
VLAN
Name
--------
---------
73
Out
74
Classification rules:
Group ID
VLAN
------------
---------
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
219
372
5.28 Web Server Commands
5.28.1 ip http server
The ip http server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a browser. To disable this function
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http server
no ip http server
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables the device to be configured from a browser.
Console (enable)# ip http server
5.28.2 ip http port
The ip http port global configuration command specifies the TCP port for use by a web browser to configure the device. To use
the default TCP port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http port port-number
no ip http port
ƒ
port-number — Port number for use by the HTTP server. (Range: 0 - 65535)
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
This default port number is 80.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. However, specifying 0 as the port number will effectively disable HTTP access
to the device.
Example
The following example shows how the http port number is configured to 100.
Console (config)# ip http port 100
5.28.3 ip https server
The ip https server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a secured browser. To disable this
function, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip https server
no ip https server
Default Configuration
The default for the device is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
You must use the crypto certificate generate command to generate the HTTPS certificate.
Example
The following example enables the device to be configured from a browser.
Console (enable)# ip https server
-34
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.28.4 ip https port
The ip https port global configuration command configures a TCP port for use by a secure web browser to configure the device.
To use the default port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip https port port-number
no ip https port
ƒ
port-number — Port number for use by the HTTP server. (Range: 0 - 65535)
Default Configuration
This default port number is 443.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the https port number to 100.
Console (enable)# ip https port 100
5.28.5 crypto certificate generate
The crypto certificate generate global configuration command generates a HTTPS certificate.
Syntax
crypto certificate generate [key-generate [length]]
key-generate — Regenerate SSL RSA key.
ƒ
length — Specifies the SSL RSA key length. If unspecified, length defaults to 1024. (Range: 512 - 2048)
Default Configuration
The Certificate and the SSL RSA key pairs do not exist.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The command is not saved in the router configuration; however, the certificate and keys generated by this command are saved
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
in the private configuration, which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device.
Example
The following example regenerates a HTTPS certificate.
Console (enable)# crypto certificate generate key-generate
5.28.6 show ip http
The show ip http privileged EXEC command displays the HTTP server configuration.
Syntax
show ip http
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC command
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the HTTP server configuration.
Console # show ip http
HTTP server enable. Port:
80
5.28.7 show ip https
The show ip http privileged EXEC command displays the HTTPS server configuration.
Syntax
show ip https
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC command
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the HTTP server configuration.
Console# show ip https
HTTPS server enabled. Port: 443
Certificate was generated.
5.29 802.1x Commands
5.29.1 aaa authentication dot1x
The aaa authentication dot1x global configuration command specifies one or more authentication, authorization, and
accounting (AAA) methods for use on interfaces running IEEE 802.1X. Use the no form of this command to return to default.
Syntax
aaa authentication dot1x default method1 [method2...]
no aaa authentication dot1x default
ƒ
method1 [method2...] — At least one from the following table:
Keyword
Description
Radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication
None
Uses no authentication
Default Configuration
The default behavior of the "aaa authenctication" for dot1.x is "failed to authenticate". If the 8021.x calls the AAA for
authentication services it will receive a fail status.
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line.
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Examples
The following example uses the aaa authentication dot1x default command with no authentication.
Console (config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none
5.29.2 dot1x system-auth-control
The dot1x system-auto-control command enables 802.1x globally. Use the no form of this command to disable 802.1x globally.
dot1x system-auto-control
no dot1x system-auto-control
Syntax
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Disabled
Command Modes
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example enables 802.1x globally.
Console (config)# dot1x system-auto-control
5.29.3 dot1x port-control
The dot1x port-control interface configuration command enables manual control of the authorization state of the port. Use the
no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
ƒ
auto — Enable 802.1X authentication on the interface and cause the port to transition to the authorized or unauthorized
state based on the 802.1X authentication exchange between the switch and the client.
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
ƒ
force-authorized — Disable 802.1X authentication on the interface and cause the port to transition to the authorized
state without any authentication exchange required. The port resends and receives normal traffic without 802.1X-based
authentication of the client.
ƒ
force-unauthorized — Deny all access through this interface by forcing the port to transition to the unauthorized state,
ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate. The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through
the interface.
Default Configuration
force-authorized
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet)
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example enables 802.1X authentication on the interface.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# dot1x port-control auto
5.29.4 dot1x re-authentication
The dot1x re-authentication interface configuration command enables periodic re-authentication of the client. Use the no form
of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x re-authentication
no dot1x re-authentication
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Periodic re-authentication is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet)
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Examples
The following example enables periodic re-authentication of the client.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# dot1x re-authentication
5.29.5 dot1x timeout re-authperiod
The dot1x timeout re-authperiod interface configuration command sets the number of seconds between reauthentication
attempts. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod
ƒ
seconds — Number of seconds between re-authentication attempts. (Range: 300 - 4294967295)
Default Configuration
3600
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts, to 3600.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# dot1x timeout re-authperiod 3600
5.29.6 dot1x re-authenticate
The dot1x re-authenticate privileged EXEC command manually initiates a re-authentication of all 802.1Xenabled ports or the
specified 802.1X-enabled port.
dot1x re-authenticate [ethernet interface]
ƒ
interface — The full syntax is: unit/port.
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following command manually initiates a re-authentication of the 802.1X-enabled port.
Console (config)# dot1x re-authenticate ethernet e8
5.29.7 dot1x timeout quiet-period
The dot1x timeout quiet-period interface configuration command sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the
quiet state following a failed authentication exchange (for example, the client provided an invalid password). Use the no form of
this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
ƒ
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the
client. (Range: 0 - 65535 seconds)
Default Configuration
60
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet)
User Guidelines
During the quiet period, the switch does not accept or initiate any authentication requests.
The default value of this command should only be changed to adjust for unusual circumstances, such as unreliable links or
specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.
If it is necessary to provide a faster response time to the user, a smaller number than the default should be entered.
Examples
The following example sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
exchange, to 3600.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# dot1x timeout quiet-period 3600
5.29.8 dot1x timeout tx-period
The dot1x timeout tx-period interface configuration command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response
to an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) - request/identity frame, from the client, before resending the request. Use the
no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
ƒ
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an EAP -request/identity frame from the client
before resending the request. (Range: 1 - 65535 seconds)
Default Configuration
30
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet)
Examples
The following command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP - request/identity frame, to
3600 seconds.
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# dot1x timeout tx-period 3600
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.29.9 dot1x max-req
The dot1x max-req interface configuration command sets the maximum number of times that the switch sends an Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP) - request/identity frame (assuming that no response is received) to the client, before restarting
the authentication process. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
ƒ
count — Number of times that the switch sends an EAP - request/identity frame before restarting the authentication
process. (Range: 1 - 10)
Default Configuartion
2
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets the number of times that the switch sends an EAP - request/identity frame, to 6
Console (config)# interface ethernet e8
Console (config-if)# dot1x max-req 6
5.29.10 dot1x timeout supp-timeout
The dot1x timeout supp-timeout interface configuration command sets the time for the retransmission of an Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request frame to the client. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout supp-timeout seconds
no dot1x timeout supp-timeout
ƒ
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an EAP-request frame from the client before
resending the request. (Range: 1 - 65535 seconds)
Default Configuration
30
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
The default value of this command should be changed only to adjust to unusual circumstances, such as unreliable links or
specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.
Examples
The following example sets the time for the retransmission of an EAP-request frame to the client, to 3600 seconds.
Console (config)# dot1x timeout server-timeout 3600
5.29.11 dot1x timeout server-timeout
The dot1x timeout server-timeout interface configuration command sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the
authentication server. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout server-timeout seconds
no dot1x timeout server-timeout
ƒ
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response from the authentication server before resending
the request. (Range: 1 - 65535 seconds)
Default Configuration
30
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server, to 3600 seconds.
console config-if(Config-VLAN)# dot1x timeout supp-timeout 3600
-35
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.29.12 show dot1x
The show dot1x privileged EXEC command displays 802.1X status for the switch or for the specified interface.
Syntax
show dot1x [ethernet interface]
ƒ
interface —The full syntax is: unit/port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays 802.1X status for the switch.
console# show dot1x
802.1x is disabled
Port
Admin
Oper
Reauth
Reauth
Mode
Mode
Control
Period
Username
-------- ------------------ ------------- -------- ---------- ----------------e1
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
e2
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
e3
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
e4
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
e5
Force Authorized
Authorized
Disabled 3600
n/a
e6
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
e7
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
e8
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
g1
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
g2
Force Authorized
Authorized*
Disabled 3600
n/a
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
* Port is down or not present
Console# show dot1x ethernet e3
Interface
Reauth
Admin Mode
Oper Mode
Reauth
Username
Control
1/e3
3600
Auto
Period
Unauthorized
Ena
Clark
State: held
Quiet period: 60
Tx period: 30
Max req: 2
Login Time: n/a
Last Authentication: n/a
MAC Address: 0008.7832.9878
Authentication Method: Remote
Termination Cause: Supplicant logoff
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Interface
The interface number.
Admin mode
The admin mode of the port. Possible values are: Force-auth, Force-unauth, Auto
Oper mode
The oper mode of the port. Possible values are: Authorized, Unauthorized.
Reauth Control
Reauthentication control.
Reauth Period
Reauthentication peiod.
Username
The User-Name representing the identity of the Supplicant.
State
The current value of the Authenticator PAE state machine.
Quiet period
The number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed
authentication exchange (for example, the client provided an invalid password).
Tx period
The number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP)-request/identity frame from the client before resending the request.
Max req
The maximum number of times that the switch sends an Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP)-request/identity frame (assuming that no response is received) to the client before
restarting the authentication process.
Login Time
How long the user is logged in.
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Last Authentication
Time since last authentication.
Mac address
The supplicant MAC address.
5.29.13 show dot1x users
The show dot1x users privileged EXEC command displays 802.1X users for the switch.
Syntax
show dot1x users [username username]
ƒ
username — Supplicant username
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays 802.1X users.
console# show dot1x users
Username
Session Time
Last Auth
Auth Method
MAC Address
Interface
---------------
--------------------
---------------
------------------
---------------------
-------------Bob
1d3h
0008.3b79.8787
John
0008.3b89.3127
58m
Remote
1/1
8h19m
2m
None
1/2
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Field
Description
Username The
User-Name representing the identity of the Supplicant.
Login Time
How long the user is logged in.
Last Authentication
Time since last authentication.
Authentication Method
The authentication method used to establish the session.
Mac address
The supplicant MAC address.
Interface
The interface that the user is using.
5.29.14 show dot1x statistics
The show dot1x statistics privileged EXEC command displays 802.1X statistics for the specified interface.
Syntax
show dot1x statistics ethernet interface
ƒ
interface — The full syntax is: unit/port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays 802.1X statistics for the specified interface.
Switch# show dot1x statistics ethernet g1
EapolFramesRx: 11
EapolFramesTx: 12
EapolStartFramesRx: 1
EapolLogoffFramesRx: 1
EapolRespIdFramesRx: 3
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
EapolRespFramesRx: 6
EapolReqIdFramesTx: 3
EapolReqFramesTx: 6
InvalidEapolFramesRx: 0
EapLengthErrorFramesRx: 0
LastEapolFrameVersion: 1
LastEapolFrameSource: 0008.3b79.8787
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
EapolFramesRx
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this
Authenticator.
EapolFramesTx
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this
Authenticator.
EapolStartFramesRx
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
EapolLogoffFramesRx
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
EapolRespIdFramesRx
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
EapolRespFramesRx
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames) that have
been received by this Authenticator.
EapolReqIdFramesTx
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.
EapolReqFramesTx
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been
transmitted by this Authenticator.
InvalidEapolFramesRx
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which
the frame type is not recognized.
EapLengthErrorFramesRx
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which
the Packet Body Length field is invalid.
LastEapolFrameVersion
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
LastEapolFrameSource
The source MAC address carried carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
5.29.15 dot1x auth-not-req
The dot1x auth-not-req interface VLAN configuration command enables unauthorized users access to that VLAN. Use the no
form of this command to disable the access.
Syntax
dot1x auth-not-req
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
no dot1x auth-not-req
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
User should be authorized to access the VLAN.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
To define a VLAN for authorized and unauthorized users use the dot1x auth-not-req interface VLAN command.
Examples
The following example enables unauthorized users access to the VLAN.
console config-if(Config-VLAN)# dot1x auth-not-req
5.29.16 dot1x multiple-hosts
The dot1x multiple-hosts interface configuration command allows multiple hosts (clients) on an 802.1X-authorized port, that
has the dot1x port-control interface configuration command set to auto. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default setting.
dot1x multiple-hosts
no dot1x multiple-hosts
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Multiple hosts are disabled. If a port would join a port-channel, the state would be multiple hosts as long as the port is member in
the port-channel.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command enables the attachment of multiple clients to a single 802.1X-enabled port. In this mode, only one of the attached
hosts must be successfully authorized for all hosts to be granted network access. If the port becomes unauthorized, all attached
clients are denied access to the network.
If a port would join a port-channel, the state would be multiple host as long as the port is member in the port-channel.
Examples
The following command allows multiple hosts (clients) on an 802.1X-authorized port.
console config-if(Config-VLAN)#dot1x multiple-hosts
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
5.29.17 dot1x single-host-violation
The dot1x single-host-violation interface configuration command configures the action to be taken, when a station whose
MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address, attempts to access the interface. Use the no form of this command to return to
default.
Syntax
dot1x single-host-violation {forward | discard | discard-shutdown} [trap seconds]
no port dot1x single-host-violation
ƒ
forward — Forward frames with source addresses not the supplicant address, but do not learn the address.
ƒ
discard — Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address.
ƒ
discard-shutdown — Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address. The port is also shutdown.
ƒ
trap seconds — Send SNMP traps, and specifies the minimum time between consecutive traps.(Range: 1- 1000000)
Default Configuration
Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address. No traps.
Command Mode
Interface configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
The command is relevant when Multiple hosts is disabled and the user has been successfully authenticated
Examples
The following example uses the forward action to forward frames with source addresses.
console config-if(Config-VLAN)# dot1x single-host-violation forward trap 100
5.29.18 show dot1x advanced
The show dot1x advanced privileged EXEC command displays 802.1X advanced features for the switch or for the specified
interface.
Syntax
show dot1x advanced [ethernet interface]
ƒ
interface — Ethernet interface
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays 802.1X advanced features for the switch.
Switch# show dot1x advanced
Guest VLAN: 3978
Unauthenticated VLANs: 91, 92
Use user attributes from Authentication Server: Enabled
User VLAN not created: Create
Interface
Multiple
Hosts
1/1
Disabled
1/2
Enabled
console# show dot1x advanced ethernet 1/1
Guest VLAN: 3978
Unauthenticated VLANs: 91, 92
Use user attributes from Authentication Server: Enabled
User VLAN not created: Create
Interface
Multiple
Hosts
1/1
Disabled
1/2
Enabled
Single Host Violation: Discard
Trap: Enabled
Frequency: 100
Status: Authorized (Locked)
Counter: 9
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
TROUBLE SHOOTING
This chapter contains information to help you solve problems. If the Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the Ethernet
Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual.
The Link LED is not lit
Solution:
Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Switch.
Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port
Solution:
Please check the VLAN, port trunking function that may introduce this kind of problem.
Performance is bad
Solution:
Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch.
If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half
duplex, then the performance will be poor.
100Base-TX port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular
Solution:
Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change
duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.
Why the Switch doesn’t connect to the network
Solution:
Check the LNK/ACT LED on the switch .Try another port on the Switch. Make sure the cable is installed properly Make sure
the cable is the right type Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again.
How to deal forgotten password situation of Switch?
Solution:
1.
Please contact Planet switch support team and the mail address is support_switch@planet.com.tw
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
APPENDEX A
A.1 Switch's RJ-45 Pin Assignments
When connecting your 10/100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is
necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any
Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ-45 receptacle/
connector and their pin assignments:
„
10/100Mbps, 10/100Base-TX
RJ-45 Connector pin assignment
Contact
„
MDI
MDI-X
Media Dependant
Media Dependant
Interface
Interface-Cross
1
Tx + (transmit)
Rx + (receive)
2
Tx - (transmit)
Rx - (receive)
3
Rx + (receive)
Tx + (transmit)
4, 5
Not used
6
Rx - (receive)
7, 8
Not used
Tx - (transmit)
1000Mbps, 1000Base T
RJ-45 Connector pin assignment
Contact
MDI
MDI-X
1
BI_DA+
BI_DB+
2
BI_DA-
BI_DB-
3
BI_DB+
BI_DA+
4
BI_DC+
BI_DD+
5
BI_DC-
BI_DD-
6
BI_DB-
BI_DA-
7
BI_DD+
BI_DC+
8
BI_DD-
BI_DC-
Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden,
is beyond the scope of this standard.
A.2 RJ-45 cable pin assignment
The standard cable, RJ-45 pin assignment
-36
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
The standard RJ-45 receptacle/connector
There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color
of straight cable and crossover cable connection:
Straight Cable
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
SIDE 1
8
SIDE 2
Straight Cable
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
SIDE 1
8
SIDE 2
SIDE 1
SIDE2
1 = White / Orange
1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
8 = Brown
SIDE 1
SIDE2
1 = White / Orange
1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
2 = Green
3 = White / Green
3 = White / Orange
4 = Blue
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
6 = Orange
7 = White / Brown
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
8 = Brown
Figure A-1: Straight-Through and Crossover Cable
Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables
into your network.
-37
User’s Manual of WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
A.3 Available Modules
The following list the available Modules for WGSW-24020/WGSW-48040
MGB-GT
SFP-port 1000Base-T Module
MGB-SX
SFP-port 1000Base-SX mini-GBIC module
MGB-LX
SFP-port 1000Base-LX mini-GBIC module
MGB-L50
SFP-port 1000Base-LX mini-GBIC module-50KM
MGB-L70
SFP-port 1000Base-LX mini-GBIC module-70KM
MGB-L120
SFP-port 1000Base-LX mini-GBIC module-120KM
MGB-LA10
SFP-port 1000Base-LX (WDM,TX:1310nm) mini-GBIC module-10KM
MGB-LB10
SFP-port 1000Base-LX (WDM,TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module-10KM
MGB-LA20
SFP-port 1000Base-LX (WDM,TX:1310nm) mini-GBIC module-20KM
MGB-LB20
SFP-port 1000Base-LX (WDM,TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module-20KM
MGB-LA40
SFP-port 1000Base-LX (WDM,TX:1310nm) mini-GBIC module-40KM
MGB-LB40
SFP-port 1000Base-LX (WDM,TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module-40KM
2081-A34030-001
-37